You are on page 1of 734

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual


MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Geometry Modeling Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

1
Introduction to ■ Overview of Capabilities, 2
Geometry ■ Concepts and Definitions, 4
Modeling
❑ Parameterization, 5
❑ Topology, 10
- Topological Congruency and Meshing, 12
❑ Connectivity, 15
❑ Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran, 17
❑ Global Model Tolerance & Geometry, 18

■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran, 19


❑ Trimmed Surfaces, 20
❑ Solids, 24
❑ Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25
- Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25
❑ Matrix of Geometry Types Created, 27

■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model, 30


❑ Building a Congruent Model, 31
❑ Building Optimal Surfaces, 33
❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 37
❑ Building B-rep Solids, 40
❑ Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids, 41

2
Accessing, ■ Overview, 46
Importing & ■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47
Exporting
❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47
Geometry
❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 55

■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57

3
Coordinate ■ Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60
Frames ■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames, 63
■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames, 66
4
Create Actions ■ Overview of Geometry Create Action, 70
■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 74
❑ Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method), 74
❑ Create Point ArcCenter, 79
❑ Extracting Points, 81
- Extracting Points from Curves and Edges, 81
- Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces, 84
- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 86
- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 88
- Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface, 90
❑ Interpolating Points, 91
- Between Two Points, 91
- Interpolating Points on a Curve, 94
❑ Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points, 97
❑ Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance, 107
❑ Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points, 109
❑ Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces, 112
❑ Creating Curves Between Points, 117
- Creating Curves Through 2 Points, 117
- Creating Curves Through 3 Points, 119
- Creating Curves Through 4 Points, 123
❑ Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method), 128
❑ Creating Chained Curves, 131
❑ Creating Conic Curves, 133
❑ Extracting Curves From Surfaces, 137
- Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option, 137
- Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option, 142
❑ Creating Fillet Curves, 144
❑ Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points, 148
❑ Creating Curves at Intersections, 150
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces, 150
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface, 154
- Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form, 157
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes, 158
❑ Manifold Curves Onto a Surface, 160
- Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option, 160
- Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option, 164
- Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form, 167
❑ Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal
Method), 168
❑ Creating Offset Curves, 171
- Creating Constant Offset Curve, 171
- Creating Variable Offset Curve, 173
- Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve, 174
❑ Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces, 176
- Project Parameters Subordinate Form, 182
❑ Creating Piecewise Linear Curves, 183
❑ Creating Spline Curves, 185
- Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option, 185
- Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option, 189
❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method), 193
❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points
(TanPoint Method), 195
❑ Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ
Method), 199
❑ Creating Involute Curves, 203
- Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option, 203
- Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option, 206
❑ Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 208
❑ Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method), 214
- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option, 214
- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option, 218
❑ Creating 2D Circle Curves, 222
❑ Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves, 226
❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method), 229
- Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option, 229
- Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option, 233
- Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form, 236
❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method), 237
❑ Creating Surfaces from Curves, 240
- Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves, 240
- Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method), 243
- Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method), 246
- Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method), 248
❑ Creating Composite Surfaces, 250
❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 255
❑ Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method), 257
❑ Extracting Surfaces, 260
- Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option, 260
- Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option, 264
❑ Creating Fillet Surfaces, 266
❑ Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 270
❑ Creating Constant Offset Surface, 272
❑ Creating Ruled Surfaces, 274
❑ Creating Trimmed Surfaces, 278
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option, 280
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option, 281
- Auto Chain Subordinate Form, 282
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option, 284
❑ Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method), 287
❑ Extruding Surfaces and Solids, 289
❑ Gliding Surfaces, 294
- Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option, 294
- Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option, 296
❑ Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method, 298
❑ Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method), 305
- Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form, 306
❑ Creating Midsurfaces, 307
- Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option, 307
- Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option, 309
❑ Creating Solid Primitives, 311
- Creating a Solid Block, 311
- Creating Solid Cylinder, 314
- Creating Solid Sphere, 317
- Creating Solid Cone, 320
- Creating Solid Torus, 323
- Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation, 326
❑ Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method), 327
- Creating Solids from Two Surfaces, 327
- Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method), 330
- Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method), 333
- Creating Solids with the N Surface Option, 336
❑ Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 338
❑ Creating a Decomposed Solid, 340
❑ Creating Solids from Faces, 343
❑ Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method), 346
❑ Gliding Solids, 348
■ Creating Coordinate Frames, 350
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method, 350
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method, 353
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method, 355
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method, 358
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method, 361
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method, 362

■ Creating Planes, 363


❑ Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method, 363
❑ Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method, 365
❑ Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method, 367
- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option, 367
- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric
Option, 369
❑ Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method, 371
❑ Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method, 372
- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option, 372
- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option, 374
❑ Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method, 375
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option, 375
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option, 377
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option, 379
❑ Creating Planes with the Offset Method, 381
❑ Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method, 383
- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option, 383
- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric
Option, 385
❑ Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method, 387

■ Creating Vectors, 389


❑ Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method, 389
❑ Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method, 391
- Between Two Points, 391
❑ Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method, 393
❑ Creating Vectors with the Normal Method, 395
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option, 395
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option, 397
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option, 399
❑ Creating Vectors with the Product Method, 402
❑ Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method, 404
5
Delete Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action, 408
■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity, 409
■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors, 410
■ Deleting Coordinate Frames, 411

6
Edit Actions ■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods, 414
■ Editing Points, 416
❑ Equivalencing Points, 416

■ Editing Curves, 418


❑ Breaking Curves, 418
- Breaking a Curve at a Point, 418
- Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location, 422
- Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location, 425
❑ Blending a Curve, 426
❑ Disassembling a Chained Curve, 429
❑ Extending Curves, 431
- Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option, 431
- Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type, 436
- Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type, 438
- Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option, 440
❑ Merging Existing Curves, 443
❑ Refitting Existing Curves, 447
❑ Reversing a Curve, 448
❑ Trimming Curves, 451
- Trimming a Curve With the Point Option, 451
- Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option, 454
■ Editing Surfaces, 457
❑ Surface Break Options, 457
- Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option, 457
- Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option, 461
- Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option, 463
- Breaking a Surface With the Point Option, 465
- Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option, 469
- Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option, 471
❑ Blending Surfaces, 475
❑ Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces, 478
❑ Matching Surface Edges, 481
- Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option, 481
- Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option, 484
❑ Extending Surfaces, 486
- Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option, 486
- Extending Surfaces to a Curve, 488
- Extending Surfaces to a Plane, 490
- Extending Surfaces to a Point, 492
- Extending Surfaces to a Surface, 494
- Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option, 496
- Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option, 498
❑ Refitting Surfaces, 500
❑ Reversing Surfaces, 501
❑ Sewing Surfaces, 503
❑ Trimming Surfaces to an Edge, 505
❑ Adding a Fillet to a Surface, 507
❑ Removing Edges from Surfaces, 508
- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option, 508
- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option, 509
❑ Adding a Hole to Surfaces, 510
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option, 510
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option, 512
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option, 514
❑ Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces, 516
❑ Adding a Vertex to Surfaces, 518
❑ Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces, 520
■ Editing Solids, 522
❑ Breaking Solids, 522
- Breaking Solids with the Point Option, 522
- Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option, 526
- Breaking Solids with the Curve Option, 531
- Breaking Solids with the Plane Option, 533
- Breaking Solids with the Surface Option, 535
❑ Blending Solids, 538
❑ Disassembling B-rep Solids, 541
❑ Refitting Solids, 543
- Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option, 543
- Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option, 544
- Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option, 545
❑ Reversing Solids, 546
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Add, 548
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Subtract, 550
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Intersect, 552
❑ Creating Solid Edge Blends, 554
- Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges, 554
- Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges, 556
❑ Imprinting Solid on Solid, 558
❑ Solid Shell Operation, 560

■ Editing Features, 562


❑ Suppressing a Feature, 562
❑ Unsuppressing a Feature, 563
❑ Editing Feature Parameters, 564
❑ Feature Parameter Definition, 565

7
Show Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods, 568
❑ The Show Action Information Form, 569

■ Showing Points, 570


❑ Showing Point Locations, 570
❑ Showing Point Distance, 571
- Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, 571
- Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, 573
- Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option, 575
- Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option, 577
- Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option, 579
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Point, 581
■ Showing Curves, 582
❑ Showing Curve Attributes, 582
❑ Showing Curve Arc, 583
❑ Showing Curve Angle, 584
❑ Showing Curve Length Range, 586
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Curve, 587

■ Showing Surfaces, 588


❑ Showing Surface Attributes, 588
❑ Showing Surface Area Range, 589
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Surface, 590
❑ Showing Surface Normals, 591

■ Showing Solids, 593


❑ Showing Solid Attributes, 593

■ Showing Coordinate Frames, 594


❑ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes, 594

■ Showing Planes, 595


❑ Showing Plane Attributes, 595
❑ Showing Plane Angle, 596
❑ Showing Plane Distance, 598

■ Showing Vectors, 599


❑ Showing Vector Attributes, 599

8
Transform Actions ■ Overview of the Transform Methods, 602
■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605
❑ Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605
❑ Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 619
❑ Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors, 629
❑ Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 640
❑ Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate
Frame Reference (MCoord Method), 648
❑ Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 656
❑ Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 665
❑ Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 674
❑ Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 683

■ Transforming Coordinate Frames, 690


❑ Translating Coordinate Frames, 690
❑ Rotating Coordinate Frames, 693
9
Verify Actions ■ Verify Action, 698
❑ Verifying Surface Boundaries, 698
❑ Verifying Surfaces for B-reps, 700
- Update Graphics Subordinate Form, 701
❑ Verify - Surface (Duplicates), 702

10
Associate Actions ■ Overview of the Associate Action, 704
❑ Associating Point Object, 705
❑ Associating Curve Object, 707

11
Disassociate ■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods, 710
Actions ❑ Disassociating Points, 711
❑ Disassociating Curves, 712
❑ Disassociating Surfaces, 713

12
The Renumber ■ Introduction, 716
Action... ■ Renumber Forms, 717
Renumbering Geo
❑ Renumber Geometry, 718
metry

INDEX ■ MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 719


Part 2: Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
1
■ Overview of Capabilities

■ Concepts and Definitions

■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran

■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

1.1 Overview of Capabilities


A powerful and important feature of MSC.Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be:
• Created.
• Directly accessed from an external CAD part file.
• Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file.
Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry. MSC.Patran maintains complete accuracy of the
original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of
the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently
maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions.
This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the
geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate
CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the MSC.Patran database.
Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities:

Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry. All loads,


boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the
geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, MSC.Patran will
automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements.
Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh,
the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain
associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties
are automatically reassigned.
For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Direct Geometry Access. Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access
(or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an
intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems:
• EDS/Unigraphics
• Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology
• CATIA by Dassault Systemes
• EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision
• CADDS 5 by Computervision
With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be
accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry
in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly
to the geometry.
For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
(p. 47).

Import and Export of Geometry. There are three file formats available to import or export
geometry:
• IGES
CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File


• Express Neutral File
In using any of the file formats, MSC.Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the
geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This
means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained.
For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File,
and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry (Ch. 2).

MSC.Patran Native Geometry. You can also create geometry in MSC.Patran (“native”
geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as
well as methods to verify, delete and show information.
MSC.Patran’s native geometry consists of:
• Points
• Parametric curves
• Bi-parametric surfaces
• Tri-parametric solids
• Boundary represented (B-rep) solids
All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior
(except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces).
Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties
directly to the geometric entity. MSC.Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior
locations on the geometric entity.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

1.2 Concepts and Definitions


There are many functions in MSC.Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the
geometry. These functions are:
• Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid.
• Creating a field function in parametric space.
• Meshing a curve, surface or solid.
• Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid.
For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its
Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various MSC.Patran functions.
The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they
are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model.
The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal
geometry model for analysis.
CHAPTER 1 5
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Parameterization
All MSC.Patran geometry are labeled one of the following:
• Point (0-Dimensions)
• Curve (1-Dimension)
• Surface (2-Dimensions)
• Solid (3-Dimensions)
Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional
surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ 1 , ξ 2 ,
ξ 3 that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”.
Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as
functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z
locations are functions of the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 .
An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an X , Y location as a function of
time, t t. If X = X ( t ) and Y = Y ( t ) , as t changes, X and Y will define a path. Parameterization
of geometry does the same thing - as the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 change, it defines various
points on the curve, surface and solid.
The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in MSC.Patran.

Point. A Point in MSC.Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ


space.
Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not
parameterized.

P
z (X,Y,Z)

x y

Figure 1-1 Point in MSC.Patran

Curve. A Curve in MSC.Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ


space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space.
Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ) , from one-dimensional
parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

A curve has one parametric variable, ξ 1 , which is used to describe the location of any given
point, P , along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.

P V2

ξ1
z V1

x y

Figure 1-2 Curve in MSC.Patran

The parameter, ξ 1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ 1 = 0 , P is at endpoint V1 and at


ξ 1 = 1 , P is at endpoint V2 .
A straight curve can be defined as:

P = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-1

Φ(ξ1)

V2
0 ξ1 1

z
ξ1
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 V1

x y

Figure 1-3 Mapping Function Phi for a Curve

Eq. 1-1 of our straight curve can be represented as:

Φξ 1 = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-2

The derivative of Φ ( ξ 1 ) in Eq. 1-2, would give us Eq. 1-3 which is the tangent of the straight
curve.

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = V2 – V1 Eq. 1-3

Because the curve is straight, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 is a constant value. The tangent, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , also defines a
vector for the curve, which is the positive direction of ξ 1 .
CHAPTER 1 7
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of ξ 1 at any point along the curve can be
found. (The vector, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , usually will not have a length of one.)

Surface. A surface in MSC.Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global


XYZ space.
A surface has two parameters, ξ 1 and ξ 2 , where at any given point, P , on the surface, P can be
located by ξ 1 and ξ 2 , as shown in Figure 1-4.

V2

ξ2
V1 P
ξ1
z V3

x y
V4

Figure 1-4 Surface in MSC.Patran

A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges.
For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20).
Similar to a curve, ξ 1 and ξ 2 for a surface have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Thus, at
ξ 1 = 0 , ξ 2 = 0 , P is at V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , ξ 2 = 1 , P is at V3 .
A surface is represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ) , which maps the parametric space into
the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2)
(0,1) (1,1)
V2

ξ2
ξ2 V1
ξ1 z ξ1 V3
(0,0) (1,0)
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 x
V4
y
0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1

Figure 1-5 Mapping Function Phi for a Surface

The first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ) results in two partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 :
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 Eq. 1-4

where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction and T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2
direction.
At any point for a given surface, T ξ1 and T ξ2 which define the tangents and the positive ξ 1 and
ξ 2 directions can be determined.
Usually T ξ1 and T ξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and
they are not perpendicular to each other.

Solid. A solid in MSC.Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ


space.
A solid has three parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , where at any given point, P , within the solid, P
can be located by ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , as shown in Figure 1-6.

Note: The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. MSC.Patran can also create
or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not
within the interior. See B-rep Solid (p. 24) for more information.

V6

V5

V2
ξ3 V7
P
ξ2
z V1
V3
ξ1
x y V4

Figure 1-6 Solid in MSC.Patran

A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.)
The parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . At (0,0,0) P
is at V1 and at (1,1,1), P is at V7 .
CHAPTER 1 9
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

A solid can be represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , which maps the parametric


space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2,ξ3)

(0,1,1) V6

(0,0,1) (1,1,1)
V5
ξ3 (1,0,1)
ξ2 ξ3 V7

ξ2
ξ1 (1,1,0)
V1
(0,0,0)
(1,0,0)
ξ1 V3

V4
z
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1
0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1
x y
0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1

Figure 1-7 Mapping Function Phi for a Solid

If we take the first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 ,


∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ3 , shown in Eq. 1-5:

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 3 = T ξ3 Eq. 1-5

Where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction, T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction,
and T ξ3 is the tangent vector in the ξ 3 direction.
At any point within a given solid, T ξ1 , T ξ2 and T ξ3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ 1 ,
ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions can be determined.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Topology
Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric
entities.
Every curve, surface and solid in MSC.Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can
reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this
include:
• Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces.
• Meshing an edge or a face of a solid.
• Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC.
Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means
you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but
topologically, they can be identical.
To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they
are different, but topologically they are the same.

A
A
B

B C
D

D
D* C
A* B

* Surface A is not connected to Surface D

Figure 1-8 Topologically Equivalent Surfaces

Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body. The types of topologic entities found in
MSC.Patran are the following:

Vertex Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A


vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex.
Edge Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a
geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.
CHAPTER 1 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Face Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface,
although a surface can exist on a face.
Body A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a B-
rep solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See
Solids (p. 24) for more information.

Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran. The connectivity for a curve,
surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be
assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where
assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin.

Important: Generally, when modeling in MSC.Patran, you do not need to know the topologic
entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of
a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form.

Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal
vertex, edge and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices,
edges and faces will also change.

V7
ED7

V2 ED2 V3 ED6 ED11 V8

F6 F2
V6 ED8
F4 ED12
ED5 V3 100
ED3 ED3
ED1 11 V5 F3
ED10 V4
ED2 F1
ξ2 F5 ED9
ξ3 ED4
V2
V1 ED4 V4 ED1 ξ1
ξ1 ξ2 V1

Figure 1-9 Vertex & Edge Numbering Figure 1-10 Face Numbering for a Solid
for a Surface

For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as:
Surface 11.3

The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as:


Surface 11.3.1

V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11.


The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1

The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:


Solid 100.1.3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100.


The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1.2.2

V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100.

Topological Congruency and Meshing


When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, MSC.Patran requires the geometry be topologically
congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries.
Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and
surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1
through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as
common vertices.
There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a
Congruent Model (p. 31) for more information.

2 4 2
1

3 5
3

Topologically Incongruent Topologically Congruent

Figure 1-11 Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces

For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share
common edges, as well as common vertices.
(MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids
to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.)
CHAPTER 1 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces. Another type of topological incongruence is shown in


Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model
Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created
along both sides of the gap.

Incongruent Surfaces

Gap > Global Model


Tolerance

Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not

Figure 1-12 Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap

MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps:


• Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270).
• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481).
For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Non-manifold Topology. Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is


non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either
necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.

Figure 1-13 Non-manifold Topology at an Edge


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces
connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold
geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold).
In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in MSC.Patran. The exception is in the creation
of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries
(p. 698) option detects non-manifold edges as well as free edges.
CHAPTER 1 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Connectivity
In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization (p. 5), the axes for the
parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and
solid.
Depending on the orientation and location of the ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 axes, this defines a unique
connectivity for the curve, surface or solid.
For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for
each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):

V2 V1

ξ1 ξ1
V1 V2

Figure 1-14 Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve

For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible
connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different
for each surface.)

V2 V3
ED1 ED2
ξ2 ED2 ED3
V1 V2
ξ1
V3 ξ2 ξ1
V4
ED4 ED1
ED3 ED4

V4 V1

Figure 1-15 Two Possible Connectivities for a Surface


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions
in MSC.Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are
shown in Figure 1-16.

V6 V6

V5 V5
V2
ξ3 V7
V2

ξ2
V8 V8 ξ3
ξ1
V1 V3 V1
ξ1 V3
ξ2
V4 V4

Figure 1-16 Two Possible Connectivities for a Solid

Plotting the Parametric Axes. MSC.Patran can plot the location and orientation of the
parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See
Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for
more information.

Modifying the Connectivity. For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by
altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry
application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).
For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the
Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the MSC.Patran Convention button or the
PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.
CHAPTER 1 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in


MSC.Patran
The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element
analysis model in the following ways:

Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs. The parameterization and connectivity for a curve,
surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. MSC.Patran stores
these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex,
Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran (p. 11) for more information.

Defines Positive Surface Normals. Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ 1 direction
with its ξ 2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ 3 direction). This affects
many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See
Building An Optimal Geometry Model (p. 30) for more information.

Defines Positive Pressure Load Directions. The parameterization and connectivity of a


curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the
surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural
LBCs Sets (p. 19) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more
information.

Helps Define Parametric Field Functions. If you reference a field function that was defined
in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material
property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s
parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 144) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information.

Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh. The MSC.Patran mapped mesher,
IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of
the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity
will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within
the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling for more information.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Global Model Tolerance & Geometry


MSC.Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it
creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry.
The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is
0.005.
When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then
MSC.Patran will only create the first point and not the second.
This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves,
surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve,
surface or solid will be created, and not the second.

Important: For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC
recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model
dimension.

For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 57) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
CHAPTER 1 1
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

1.3 Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran


Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in MSC.Patran:1
• Point (default color is cyan)
• Parametric Curve (default color is yellow)
• Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green)
• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)
MSC.Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume
Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) and Solids (p. 24) for more information.
You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the
PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) for more information.
For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry
Types Created (p. 27).

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Trimmed Surfaces
Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be
accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral
file; and they can be created in MSC.Patran.
Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges,
and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts.
Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed
surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This
parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface.
You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in MSC.Patran:1
• General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta)
• Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green)
• Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta)
• Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green)
(Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric
surface.)

Important: Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be
meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite
trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with
IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling for more information. Also note that some geometric operations
are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed
surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid.

General Trimmed Surface. A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges
and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are
defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the
Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).) An example is shown in
Figure 1-17.
All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default
color of magenta.2

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
2The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
CHAPTER 1 2
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Inner Edges or
Holes

Outer Surface Edges

Figure 1-17 General Trimmed Surface

Simply Trimmed Surface. A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot
have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the
bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in
Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges
degenerating to a zero length edge.)
Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed
loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).
All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default
color of green. 1

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Four Outer Edges

Underlying Invisible Parent Surface

Figure 1-18 Simply Trimmed Surface

Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a
general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the
bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for
analysis.

Composite Trimmed Surface. The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface
that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific
boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface
is similar to evaluations on the MSC.Patran trim surface (General Trimmed Surface). The big
difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces.
The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a
single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of
determining where and when to move from one surface to another.
APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface.
It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the
composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the
cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true
with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light
direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is
defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears.
CHAPTER 1 2
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface.

Step 1 Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a MSC.Patran curve
chain entity.
Step 2 Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar
Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important
aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector
must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under
Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the
composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the
possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one
another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create
more than one composite trimmed surface.
Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it
cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this
would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take
three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every
120 degrees of rotation.
Step 3 Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the
composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may
individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all
visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might
cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.

RULES:
1. The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any
portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur.
2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any
position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain.

Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface. The only difference between an Ordinary Composite
Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges
comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solids
There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in MSC.Patran:1
• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)
• B-rep Solid (default color is white)
• Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red)
on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method.

Tri-Parametric Solid. All solids in MSC.Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are
tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside
the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes.
Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh.

Important: IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some
wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a
tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.

B-rep Solid. A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that
define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not
the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19.
The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior
of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric
surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces.
B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary
Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) on using the form.

Figure 1-19 B-rep Solid in MSC.Patran

B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
CHAPTER 1 2
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Parametric Cubic Geometry


Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic
geometry is supported in MSC.Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import
and export.
You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and tri-
parametric cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most
Geometry application forms.

Important: Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in
most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to
create parametric cubic geometry.

Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in MSC.Patran, which are referred to as “grids”,
“lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.”
Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric
cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation:
3 2
Z ( ξ1 ) = S1 ξ1 + S2 ξ1 + S3 ξ1 + S4 Eq. 1-6

where Z ( ξ 1 ) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; S 1 , S 2 , S 3 ,
and S 4 are arbitrary constants; and ξ 1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .
For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry


There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry.

Limits on Types of Curvature. There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are
allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20).
Eq. 1-7 and Eq. 1-8 below represent the first and second derivatives of Eq. 1-6:
2
Z′ ( ξ 1 ) = 3S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 ξ 1 + S 3 Eq. 1-7

Z″ ( ξ 1 ) = 6S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 Eq. 1-8

Eq. 1-7 shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and Eq. 1-
8 shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.

YES YES YES YES

NO NO
YES NO

Figure 1-20 Limitations of the Parametric Cubic Curvature


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs. When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic
curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated
by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a
parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the
arc decreases.
Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent
error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees.
When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to
determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you.
For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the
true arc length.
For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic
geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc
lengths should be 30 degrees or less.

Percent Error = 100*(Computed Radius - Actual Arc Radius) / Actual Radius


3.0
Percent Error in the Radius (x 10-2)

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Total Subtended Angle in Degrees
Figure 1-21 Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc
CHAPTER 1 2
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Matrix of Geometry Types Created


All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms:
• Point
• Curve
• Surface
• Solid
• Plane
• Vector
• Coordinate Frame
MSC.Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface
and tri-parametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action.
Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The
tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing
the PATRAN 2 Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is
recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.)
For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create
Action (p. 70) and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).
Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran

PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Curve Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Cubic Not Applicable
Arc3Point Arc Yes
2D Arc2Point Arc Yes
2D Arc3Point Arc Yes
2D Circle Circle Yes
Conic Parametric Cubic N/A
Extract Curve On Surface Yes
Fillet Parametric Cubic N/A
Fit Parametric Cubic N/A
Intersect PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes
Involute Parametric Cubic N/A
Normal Parametric Cubic N/A
2D Normal Parametric Cubic N/A
2D ArcAngles Arc Yes
Point Parametric Cubic N/A
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran (continued)

PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Curve Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
Project Curve On Surface Yes
PWL Parametric Cubic N/A
Revolve Arc Yes
Spline, Loft Spline option PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes
Spline, B-Spline option PieceWise Rational Polynomial Yes
Spline, B-Spline option NURB* Yes
TanCurve Parametric Cubic N/A
TanPoint Parametric Cubic N/A
Chain Composite Curve No
Manifold Curve On Surface Yes

* NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is
ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu.
This is true whether you create the spline in MSC.Patran or if you import the spline from
an IGES file. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise
Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead.

Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran

PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Surface Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Bi-Cubic Not Applicable
Curve Curve Interpolating Surface Yes
Decompose Trimmed Surface Yes
Edge Generalized Coons Surface Yes
Extract Surface On Solid Yes
Extrude Extruded Surface Yes
Fillet Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Glide Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Match Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Normal Sweep Normal Surface N/A
Revolve Surface of Revolution Yes
CHAPTER 1 2
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran (continued)

PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Surface Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
Ruled Ruled Surface No
Vertex Curve Interpolating Surface Yes
Trimmed (Surface Option) Trimmed Surface No
Trimmed (Planar Option) Trimmed Surface No
Trimmed (Composite Composite Trimmed Surface No
Option)

Table 1-3 Types of Solids Created in MSC.Patran

PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Solid Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Tri-Cubic Not Applicable
Extrude Extruded Solid Yes
Face Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face Yes
Glide Glide Solid Yes
Normal Sweep Normal Solid Yes
Revolve Solid of Revolution Yes
Surface Surface Interpolating Solid Yes
Vertex Parametric Tri-Cubic N/A
B-rep Ordinary Body No
Decompose Tri-Parametric Yes
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

1.4 Building An Optimal Geometry Model


A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis
model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it
impossible to build or complete the analysis model.
In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly
trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to
build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed
surface or B-rep solid.
The following sections will explain how to:
• Build a congruent model.
• Verify and align surface normals.
• Build trimmed surfaces.
• Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces.
• Build a B-rep solid.
• Build degenerate surfaces or solids.
CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Building a Congruent Model


MSC.Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will
be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)
for more information.
For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with
Isomesh or Paver, MSC.Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by
surfaces 1, 2 and 3.

Figure 1-22 Incongruent Set of Surfaces

To make the surfaces in Figure 1-22 congruent, you can:


• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching
Surface Edges (p. 481) on using the form.
• Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options
(p. 457) on using the form.
The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form.
To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown
in Figure 1-23:

4 2

5
3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Figure 1-23 Congruent Set of Surfaces

The entries for the Edit/Surface/Break form are shown below:

◆ Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break

Option: Point

Delete Original Surfaces Pressing this button will delete surface 1,


after the break.

Surface List: Surface 1 Cursor select or enter the ID for surface 1.

Break Point List Point 10 Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10,
as shown in Figure 1-24.

Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Cursor select
Surface 1 for the
Surface List on 2
the form.
1
10 Cursor select Point
10 for the Point List
on the form.
3

Figure 1-24 Cursor Locations for Surface Break


CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Building Optimal Surfaces


Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element
analysis model of the design or mechanical part.
Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is
aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model.

Avoid ing Sharp Corners. In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that
you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep
the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more.
The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the
elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed
the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be.

Note: You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will
look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines
under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometric Attributes
(p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element
analysis code.

1 1

2
4 2
4
3
3

Surfaces With Sharp Corners Optimal Surface Shapes

Figure 1-25 Surfaces With and Without Sharp Corners


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals Using Edit/Surface/Reverse. MSC.Patran can


determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing
the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each
surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.

ξ1
ξ2
ξ2
ξ1

Figure 1-26 Opposing Normals for Two Surfaces

Important: In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces
in a model.

The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive
pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and
the element connectivity.
Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align
the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces (p. 501) on using the form.
CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals. For example, Figure 1-27 shows a
group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or
align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:

◆ Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse

Surface List Surface 1:8 Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF
before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8.
Draw Normal Vectors And do not press Apply. Apply will
reverse the normals.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Figure 1-27 Group of Surfaces to Verify Normals

You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors,
as shown in Figure 1-28.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Figure 1-28 Surface Normal Vectors


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Align the normals by reversing the normals for surfaces 1 through 4:

Surface List Surface 1:4


-Apply-
Draw Normal Vectors This will plot the updated normal vector
directions.

Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Figure 1-29 Aligned Surface Normal Vectors


CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces


Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there
may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface
into a series of three or four sided surfaces.
One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh
can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create
tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh.
To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose
form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 255) on using the form.
When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the
bottom of the screen will show the following icons:

Point/Vertex/Edge Point/Interior Point. This will select a point for decomposing in


the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used
or a point will be projected onto the surface.

Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on
the surface, it will be projected onto the surface.

Use to cursor select a point location on an edge of a trimmed surface.

Use to cursor select a point location inside a trimmed surface.

Use to cursor select a vertex of a trimmed surface.

Example. Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface
4 into four four-sided surfaces.
20
21

26

25
24 22

23

Figure 1-30 Trimmed Surface to be Decomposed


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows
surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The
point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4
Use
Use

to cursor select
to cursor select this point
these three location along
vertices. the edge.

Figure 1-31 Point Locations for Decomposed Surface 4

Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons
used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.

Use
to cursor select this
Use point along the edge
to cursor select these for Surface 5.
three vertices for
Surface 5.
5

6 Use
Use to cursor select these
to cursor select these four vertices for
three vertices for Surface 7.
Surface 6.
Use
to cursor select this
point along the edge
for Surface 6.
CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Figure 1-32 Point Locations for Decomposed Surfaces 5, 6 and 7

Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide. Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide
to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display
lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Building B-rep Solids


Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s
Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) for
more information on the form.
There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in MSC.Patran:
1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume.
2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share
a common edge.
3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown
in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body.
This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied.
B-rep solids created in MSC.Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh.

Important: At this time, MSC.Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and
no interior shells.

9
8

4 7
3 10
1

6
2 5

Y Z
1
X

Figure 1-33 Surface Normals for B-rep Solid


CHAPTER 1 4
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids


A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid
can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively).
The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a
degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid.

Important: IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some
wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create
tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create
tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids.

Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle). There are two ways you can create a degenerate,
three-sided surface:
• Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces
from Edges (Edge Method) (p. 257) on using the form.
• Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating
Surfaces Between 2 Curves (p. 240) on using the form.
Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve
option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve
select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.

Cursor select this point twice

using this icon:

Cursor select this in the Curve select menu for the


edge or curve for the Starting or Ending Curve List.
Starting or Ending
Curve List.

Figure 1-34 Creating a Degenerate Surface Using Create/Surface/Curve

Building a Degenerate Solid

Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron). A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the
Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a
point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as
shown in Figure 1-35.

Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron). A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

• The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces
(p. 343) on using the form.
• The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from
Surfaces (Surface Method) (p. 327) on using the form.
Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the
pentahedron and a wedge.

For the Starting Surface List,

highlight and

in the select menu, and cursor


select this point twice for the
first edge of the surface.

Highlight again,

then, cursor select this same


point twice again.

Cursor select this surface or face for the


Ending Surface List.

Figure 1-35 Creating a Tetrahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

For the Starting Surface List,

highlight and

in the select menu, and cursor


select this point twice for the
first edge of the surface.

Highlight again,

then, cursor select this same


point twice again.

Cursor select this surface or face for the


Ending Surface List.

Figure 1-36 Creating a Pentahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface


CHAPTER 1 4
Introduction to Geometry Modeling

For the Starting Surface List,

highlight

in the select menu, and cursor


select this curve twice.

Cursor select this surface or face for the


Ending Surface List.

Figure 1-37 Creating a Wedge Using Create/Solid/Surface


PART 2
Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER
Accessing, Importing & Exporting
2 Geometry

■ Overview

■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

2.1 Overview
MSC.Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be
imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. MSC.Patran can export
(or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file.
Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import
menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the MSC.Patran main form. Geometry
can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus.
For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see Importing
Models (p. 26) and Export (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD
Geometry (p. 47).
For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file,
see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57).
For more information on which IGES entities are supported by MSC.Patran for importing and
exporting, see Supported IGES Entity Types - Import (p. 51) and Supported IGES Entity
Types -Export (p. 116) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
CHAPTER 2 4
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

2.2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry


MSC.Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD
systems that are listed in Table 2-1.
This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and
its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build
upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads
and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry.
You can execute a specific MSC.Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models
menus on the main form. See Importing Models (p. 26) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.
For more information on using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER
Files (p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files
(p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Table 2-1 Supported CAD Systems and Their MSC.Patran CAD Access Modules

MSC.Patran CAD Access


Supported CAD System
Module *
EDS/Unigraphics MSC.Patran Unigraphics

Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology MSC.Patran ProENGINEER

CATIA by Dassault Systemes MSC.Patran CATIA

EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision MSC.Patran EUCLID 3

CADDS 5 by Computervision MSC.Patran CADDS 5

* Each MSC.Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appro-
priate external CAD file. You can find out which MSC.Patran products are currently li-
censed by pressing the MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and
then pressing the License button on the form that appears.

Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics


If MSC.Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an
external EDS/Unigraphics part file.

Features of MSC.Patran Unigraphics


• Unigraphics part file can be accessed in MSC.Patran using one of two methods. The
first method is express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid
transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored
in a MSC.Patran database.
• MSC.Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any
approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the
direct parasolid method.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

• CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined
EDS/Unigraphics entity types, levels, and layers.
• You can automatically create MSC.Patran groups when accessing the geometry based
on the defined entity types, levels, or layers.
For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files
(p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import
1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is
topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see
Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12).
Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices,
and that there are no gaps between the faces.
2. You can improve MSC.Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of
entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the MSC.Patran Import form
and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before
you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “Bounded-
Plane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option,
the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only.
3. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then
select to only those layers in the MSC.Patran Import form before importing the part.
4. Make sure the MSC.Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if
you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is
0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge
length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some
models.

Face 1 Gap Face 1 Zero Gap

Face 2 Face 2

NOT Topologically Valid Topologically Valid


(lacking congruent edge) (with congruent edge)

Figure 2-1 Topologically Congruent Surfaces for MSC.Patran Unigraphics


CHAPTER 2 4
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry. This section provides helpful hints and
recommendations regarding the usage of MSC.Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration.

Solid Geometry Guidelines


Disassembling The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can
Solids be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one
command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being
disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex
meshing. This command will convert all 4-sided B-rep Solid faces into
simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct
tri-parametric solids.
Solids Break If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid:
1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble).
2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If
this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the
Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue
with the break operation.
3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful:
• Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)).
If this operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit)
before the break operation.
• Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose
the individual solid volumes.
• Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the
B-rep can not be created due to surface gaps, use
Edit/Surface/Sew and try again.
Global Model After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid
Tolerance Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the
models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended
tolerance for MSC.Patran applications to use for best results.
Solids - Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about
Group Transform transforming solids in pre-release format, see (p. 50).
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Meshing Guidelines
Hybrid The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if
TetMesher - attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease
Global Edge the global edge length.
Lengths
Hybrid The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the
TetMesher - mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize
Mesh Control existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match
adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize
a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing,
follow these steps:
• Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds.
• Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular
elements which completely enclose the desired geometric volume.
• Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular
elements as input.
Paver If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making
congruent meshes:
• Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry.
• Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit.
• Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue.
• Mesh again.
CHAPTER 2 5
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

PRE-RELEASE CAPABILITY: Solid Geometry Guidelines


Solids - Group Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is
Transform required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the
transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the
desired geometry in MSC.Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable
before executing MSC.Patran. At the system prompt, type:
setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1
which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform
the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as
planned. If not, either:
• Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element
mesh, with the limitation being that element properties and
loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the
finite elements; or
• Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that
result from the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as
Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the
surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep.
• Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the
Express Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a
transformation of the geometry is supported.

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines


Surface Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency.
Congruency Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore,
geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry
through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly
as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric
surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent.
It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in
Unigraphics prior to access by MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran offers the
ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is
the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies.
Unigraphics Sew “Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON
With Verify During during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all
Geometry Access incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify
whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful.
The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines


Problem MSC.Patran detects three different types of anomalies during
Unigraphics Unigraphics part file import:
Entities From a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special
Import actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces
are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these
surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be
replaced. As such, MSC.Patran will not attempt to include these
surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these
surfaces be refitted once imported into MSC.Patran. You will find
these surfaces in a group named, <model_name>_UG_SUSPECT.
b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model,
MSC.Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure
consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the
checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing
and MSC.Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke
window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please
reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks (p. 52) for
steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct
the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into MSC.Patran.
If UG sewing is turned on for the MSC.Patran import, there is a chance
that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be
brought into MSC.Patran and put into a group named,
<model_name>_UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities
in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend
you first commit/save the MSC.Patran database and then reconstruct
these bodies if possible.
c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close
to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap
surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group
named, <model_name>_GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported
model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the
model.
Unigraphics Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely
Model Checks useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some
geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide
results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available
at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you
use this on surfaces and any are ill-defined, they will be flagged as
“suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu
bar. To run all checks:
• Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry...
• Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”.
• Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable.
NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle
tolerance is 0.5 units.
CHAPTER 2 5
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines


MSC.Patran In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, MSC.Patran
Surface Sew offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what
Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics
surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the
MSC.Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed
through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the
Unigraphics and MSC.Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of
the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first
option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes,
after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together
(Edit/Surface/Sew).
The other option for sewing the model using MSC.Patran surface
sewing is to increase the global tolerance in MSC.Patran and sew the
model again. Changing the global tolerance in MSC.Patran is generally
not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of
increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the
incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if
they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot
be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The
tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance
between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be
shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the
“allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or
edge match) operation.
(Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist
which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for
gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the
model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure
that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance
be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of
increasing it by an order of magnitude.)
Refitting The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially
Geometry viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents
subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc.
Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the
Geometry application. These functions will more regularly
parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this
typically involves those with compound curvature), which can
currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models.
Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines


Edit/Surface/Refit As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the
Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic
Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include:
• Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled
with subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by
using MSC.Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc.
• Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling,
transforming, etc.
• Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for
regioning).
Curves Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not
Coincident With equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the
Surface and Solid “Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not
Edges detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary
Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact
they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation:
• Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when
required.
• If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function
Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid
vertices.
• Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.
CHAPTER 2 5
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER


If MSC.Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from
an external Pro/ENGINEER part file.
You can execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER either from MSC.Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER
by doing one of the following:

Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From MSC.Patran. Execute MSC.Patran


ProENGINEER from MSC.Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the
Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files
(p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions for more information.

Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER

Important: Make sure MSC.Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following
the instructions in Selecting Products (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Patran Installation and
Operations Guide.

Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from Pro/ENGINEER by doing the following:


1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering:
p3_proe
p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press <CR> if you
want to accept the default command pro.
Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER.
[pro]?: <cr>
2. Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER
menus in the following order:
File
Export
Model
Patran Geom
The MSC.Patran menu will list four options:
Filter
Run MSC.Patran
Create .db
Create .geo
You can select any one of the above four options.
If Filter is selected:
• A menu appears which allows the user to select:
Datum Points
Datum Curves
Datum Surfaces
Datum Planes
Coordinate System Datums
for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities).
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

If Run MSC.Patran is selected:


• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
• MSC.Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and
opened.
• The MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the
Pro/ENGINEER geometry will be loaded into the MSC.Patran database, and
both Pro/ENGINEER and MSC.Patran will remain executing.
If Create .db is selected:
• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
• A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will:
One, execute MSC.Patran and create and open a database.
Two, load the.geo file into the MSC.Patran database.
And, three, close the database and exit MSC.Patran.
If Create .geo is selected, a MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be
created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
For more information on the MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing
MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 122) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
CHAPTER 2 5
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

2.3 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic


Geometry
The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran.
With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, MSC.Patran can import or export only parametric cubic
geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form.
MSC.Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file.
Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file.
Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not
be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action
methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry.
For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN
2.5 Neutral Files (p. 76) and Exporting a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25).
For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in MSC.Patran, see
Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 27).
For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting an IGES File (p. 115) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER
Coordinate Frames
3
■ Coordinate Frame Definitions

■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames

■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate


Frames
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

3.1 Coordinate Frame Definitions


MSC.Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames:
• Rectangular (X,Y,Z)
• Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z)
• Spherical (R, Theta, Phi)
MSC.Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the
default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another
coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified.
Each coordinate system defined in MSC.Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how
spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and
3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular,
cylindrical or spherical.
When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the
appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the
coordinate frame’s origin.

Important: Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that
is, θ and Φ ) are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining
spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more
information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 133) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Rectangular Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular
coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space. In a rectangular frame, the principal axes
1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a
rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, y-coordinate and z-
coordinate.

Axis 3 P = (X, Y, Z)

Axis 2
Y
X
Axis 1
Y
X

Figure 3-1 Rectangular Coordinate Frame


CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames

Cylindrical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal
axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a
cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and z-
coordinate.

Axis 3 P = (R,θ, Z)

Axis 2
T(θ)
R

Axis 1
θ
R

Figure 3-2 Cylindrical Coordinate Frame

Spherical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes
1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and P ( Φ ) axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical
coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate, and phi-
coordinate.
A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical
coordinate frame. For example:

If node lies along R direction, then dir 1 of node is along +R


If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P
If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T
If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T
If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P
If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R
If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P
If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T
If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 22) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.

P (Φ)

Axis 3 P = (R,θ, φ)

R
Axis 2
T(θ)

Axis 1
φ
R

Figure 3-3 Spherical Coordinate Frame Definition


CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames

3.2 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames


There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame
in MSC.Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create
action:
• 3Point
• Axis
• Euler
• Normal
• 2Vector
• View Vector
For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating
Coordinate Frames (p. 350).
You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate
methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames (p. 690).
The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames.

3 Point Method. Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a
coordinate frame by specifying three points:

3
A point location, using the other two A point location on axis 3.
points, that defines a plane formed
by axis
1 and 3.
A point location at the origin.

Figure 3-4 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the 3 Point Method


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Axis Method. Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by
specifying a point location at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on
one of the two remaining axes.

Second, a point location on axis 1, 2,


or 3 (you may choose which one).

Third, a point location on one of First, a point location at the origin.


the two remaining axes (you may
choose
which one).

Figure 3-5 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Axis Method

Euler Method. The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations
from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order
shown:
1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID.
2. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin.
3. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1.
4. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 2.
5. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 3.
The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are
made.
CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames

Normal Method. Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame,
where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the
surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ 1 parametric direction with the ξ 2
direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the axis 2 direction is
orthogonal to axis 1 and 3.
For more information on the definition of the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes, see Parameterization
(p. 5).

Y
X Z

ξ2

ξ1

Figure 3-6 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Normal Method


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

3.3 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear


Coordinate Frames
You can translate or scale geometry in MSC.Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate
method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating
Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 605) or Scaling Points, Curves,
Surfaces, Solids and Vectors (p. 629).
On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in
Refer. CF toggle.
If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical
coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be
interpreted as R, θ , Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ , Φ for the spherical system. (Both
the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.)
Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the
Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.

3
1 4

2 1
T R
2
1
Z

Y 5

6
X
Z

Figure 3-7 Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated <1 90 0> within Cylindrical
Coordinate Frame 1
CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames

2
3
1

2 1

T R
1
Z

X
Z 4

Figure 3-8 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1

3
4 1

2 1

Y T R
1
Z
X
Z

Figure 3-9 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

2
1

2 1 3
4

Y T R
1
Z
X
Z

Figure 3-10 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <1 2 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1

Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical
coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical)
coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis
of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate
system. Therefore, in MSC.Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or
at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER
Create Actions
4
■ Overview of Geometry Create Action

■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

■ Creating Coordinate Frames

■ Creating Planes

■ Creating Vectors
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

4.1 Overview of Geometry Create Action


Select any method to obtain detailed help.

Object Method Description


Point ❏ XYZ Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing nodes
or vertices.
❏ ArcCenter Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves.
❏ Extract Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate location.
❏ Interpolate Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that
are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart.
❏ Intersect Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of
entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve,
Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.
❏ Offset Creates a point on an existing curve.
❏ Pierce Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a
surface or solid face.
❏ Project Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are either
projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected
through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face.
Curve ❏ Point Creates curves through two, three or four point locations.
❏ Arc3Point Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point
locations.
❏ Chain Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing curves.
Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces.
❏ Conic Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and a
starting and ending points.
❏ Extract Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric coordinate
location or on an edge of the surface.
❏ Fillet Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing
curves or edges.
❏ Fit Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on a
least squares fit.
❏ Intersect Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Manifold Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or more
point locations.
❏ Normal Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face to a
point location.
❏ Offset Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing curve.
CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Object Method Description


Curve ❏ Project Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is projected
(cont.) onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or
based on the current view angle.
❏ PWL Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point
locations.
❏ Spline Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point locations.
❏ TanCurve Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges.
❏ TanPoint Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve.
❏ XYZ Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Involute Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii
option.
❏ Revolve Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.
❏ 2D Normal Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or
edge and that lies within a defined plane.
❏ 2D Circle Creates a circle within a defined plane.
❏ 2D ArcAngles Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane.
❏ 2D Arc2Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses a
starting, ending and center point locations.
❏ 2D Arc3Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that passes
through a starting, middle and ending point locations.
Surface ❏ Curve Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N curves
or edges.
❏ Composite Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces.
❏ Decompose Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed surface)
based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface.
❏ Edge Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges.
❏ Extract Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric
coordinate location or on the face of the solid.
❏ Fillet Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two
existing surfaces or faces.
❏ Match Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two
specified surfaces.
❏ Offset Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface.
❏ Ruled Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or edges.
❏ Trimmed Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve loop
and optionally, an inner chained curve loop.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Object Method Description


Surface ❏ Vertex Creates a surface from four point locations.
(cont.)
❏ XYZ Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Extrude Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded
through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.
❏ Glide Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or
edge, along one or more base curves or edges.
❏ Normal Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness.
❏ Revolve Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.
❏ Mesh Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh).
Solid ❏ Primitive Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user input a
point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also
provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target
solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool
solid.
❏ Surface Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or faces.
❏ B-rep Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a closed
volume.
❏ Decompose Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex
locations on each face.
❏ Face Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces.
❏ Vertex Creates solids from eight point locations.
❏ XYZ Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Extrude Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded
through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.
❏ Glide Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or edge,
along one or more base surfaces or faces.
❏ Normal Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness.
❏ Revolve Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.
CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Object Method Description


Coord ❏ 3Point Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point
on Plane 1-3.
❏ Axis Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1
and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1
❏ Euler Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3.
❏ Normal Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame whose
Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is
at a point location.
Plane ❏ Vector Normal Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a
specified direction as the plane normal.
❏ Curve Normal Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve as
the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane
normal.
❏ Interpolate Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as
the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane
normals.
❏ Least Squares Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more
specified non-colinear points.
❏ Offset Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified
offset distance.
❏ Surface Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified
Tangent surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as
the plane normal.
❏ 3 Points Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane
origin is located at the first point.
❏ Point-Vector Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.
Vector ❏ Magnitude Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector
direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector.
❏ Intersect Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes. The
vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that
intersecting line.
❏ Normal Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane and
the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane.
❏ Product Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors and
has its base point located at the base point of the first vector.
❏ 2 Point Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing to
a specified tip point.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

4.2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids


Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method)
The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or
other point location as provided in the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: XYZ
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
Point ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
5
Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Used to express the coordinate values entered in the
Point Coordinate List, within the reference frame. Default
Coord 0 is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Point Coordinates List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
[0 0 0]

Specify the existing cartesian coordinates or point


location for the new points, either by entering the
-Apply- coordinates from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the
point location. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node
20, Solid 10.4.3.1.
The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Point XYZ Method Example


Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular
coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 3

Object: Point
Method: XYZ 2

Point ID List
6 1

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute 4
Y
Point Coordinates List
[10 5 3.125] Z X
5

-Apply- After:
3

Y 4
6

Z X
5
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point XYZ Method On a Surface Example


Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point
5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 2 3
Method: XYZ

Point ID List
5
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0

Auto Execute 1 Y 4
Point Coordinates List Z X
Construct Point Surface Point

-Apply-
After:

2 3

1
5

1 Y 4

Z X

Point Select Menu Icons


CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Point XYZ Method At Nodes Example


Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which
locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10 11
Object: Point
Method: XYZ

Point ID List
1

Refer. Coordinate Frame


12 13
Coord 0

Auto Execute Y
Point Coordinates List
Z X
Node 10:13

-Apply-
After:

1 2

3 4

Z X

Point Select Menu Icon


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point XYZ Method At Screen Location Example


Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which
locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: XYZ

Point ID List
1

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute Y

Point Coordinates List


Z X
[1.596433 0.096824 0.000000]

-Apply-
After:

1
2

5
Y

Z X

Point Select Menu Icon


CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Create Point ArcCenter


The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which
have a non-zero center/radius of curvature.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Arc Center
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Point ID List
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
48

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Curve List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the existing curves or edges either by cursor selecting


-Apply- them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point ArcCenter Method Example


Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point 1
Method: Arc Center

Point ID List
2
3

Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1 Y

Z X
-Apply- 1

After:

Y 3
Z X
1
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions

Extracting Points
Extracting Points from Curves and Edges
Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric ξ 1 coordinate location of
the curve or edge, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .

Geometry
Select the curve icon to extract a point from a curve.
Action: Create
Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Extract Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the


point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the
Point ID List curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will
5 create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of
the curve.

Parameterization Method Specify the curve’s or edge’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, where


◆ Equal Arc Length ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar
or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is

◆ Equal Parametric Values defined by the connectivity of the curve or edge. You can plot
the ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the menus
Parametric Position
Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
0.0 1.0
0.5 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
u Parametric Value need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute ☞ More Help:


Curve List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the
-Apply-
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions

Specify the existing curves or edges to extract points from, either


by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Extract Method Example


Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to
0.75, on Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract 6

1
1

Point ID List
7
5
Parameterization Method
Y
◆ Equal Arc Length

◆ Equal Parametric Values Z X

Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
0.75
After:
u Parametric Value

Auto Execute
Curve List
6
Curve 1

1
-Apply- 1

5
Y

Z X
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions

Point Extract Method Example


Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to
0.75, on the edge of Surface 1.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
2 3
Method: Extract

Point ID List
5

Parameterization Method Y
1 4
◆ Equal Arc Length
◆ Z X
◆ Equal Parametric Values

Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
0.75 After:
u Parametric Value

2 5 3
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1.4

1
-Apply-

1 Y 4

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces


Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location
on the surface.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract

Select the icon to create a Single Point.

Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0 Specify the surface or faces’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate
value , which have a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the
0.5 slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and
u Parametric Value ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface
or face. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 directions by choosing the
0.0 1.0 Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties
0.5 form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
v Parametric Value

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the existing surfaces or faces to create points on,


either by cursor selecting the surfaces or faces or by
-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1
or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surfaces or faces.
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions

Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Method Example


Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is
located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.333 and ξ 2 ( v ) is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2 3

Object: Point
Method: Extract

Point ID List
1

Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
Y
0.333 1 4
u Parametric Value Z X

0.0 1.0
0.666 After:
v Parametric Value 2 3

Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1 5

1
-Apply-

Y
1 4
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces


Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of
points is defined by a diagonal of two points.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract

Select the icon to create Multiple Points.

Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Number of Points
u Direction Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction
of the surface.
2

v Direction
2

Bounds
Specify the Bounds as Diagonal Points when two point
Diagonal Points locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points
to be extracted from the surface.
Parametric

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Point 1 List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the two points to define the diagonal for the points,
either by cursor selecting the points or by entering the IDs from
Point 2 List the keyboard. Example: Point 1 or Curve 1.1, Surface 1.1.1.
The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate points.
Surface List
Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either
by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
-Apply- to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Diagonal Method Example


Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2 3
Object: Point
Method: Extract

5
Point ID List
7

Number of Points Y
1 4
u Direction Z X
4

v Direction After:
6 2 3

Bounds
Diagonal Points
Parametric 26 27 28 6
22 23 24 25
Auto Execute 18 19 20 21
1
14 15 16 17
Point 1 List 10 11 12 13
Point 5 5 7 8 9

Point 2 List
Point 6
Y
Surface List 1 4
Z X
Surface 1

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces


Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of
points is defined by a parametric ξ , ξ 2 diagonal.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract

Select the icon to create Multiple Points.

Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Number of Points
u Direction Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction
of the surface.
2

v Direction
2

Specify the Bounds as Parametric when two parametric


Bounds locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points
to be extracted from the surface.
Diagonal Points
Parametric
Display the Parametric Bounds form to define the u,v
parametric locations to define the bounds of the points.
[Parametric Bounds...]

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Surface List
Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either
by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
-Apply- to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Parametric Method Example


Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, v-
min=0.333, and v-max=0.666.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2 3

Object: Point
Method: Extract

Point ID List
5
Y
Number of Points 1 4
u Direction Z X

4
After:
v Direction
2 3
6

Bounds
Diagonal Points
25 26 27 28
Parametric
21 22 23 24
17 18 19 20
1
[Parametric Bounds...] 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12
Auto Execute 5 6 7 8

Surface List
Surface 1
Y
1 4
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface

Parametric Bounds Specify the surface’s x1 (u) and x2 (v) coordinate values for the
u v Bounds definition of the bounds of the points, either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox. The x1and x2
0.0 1.0 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face.
0.0 (x1 has a range of 0 £ x1 £ 1 and x2 has a range of 0 £ x2 £ 1)
u-Min You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by choosing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
0.0 1.0 under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
1.0
u-Max
0.0 1.0
0.0
v-Min

0.0 1.0
1.0
v-Max

Reset

OK Cancel
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions

Interpolating Points
Between Two Points
The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform
spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to
be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location
provided by the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
Point ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
5 Functions.

Option: Point
Enter the number of interior points you want to create
Number of Interior Points between the specified point locations in the Point 1 and
Point 2 Coordinates List.
1

Point Spacing Method Select either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point
◆ Uniform spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON,
then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1

◆ Nonuniform ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.

Specify in the Point 1 Coordinates listbox, the starting


Auto Execute point location to begin the interpolation. Specify in the
Point 2 Coordinates listbox, the ending point location to
Point 1 Coordinates List end the interpolation.
You can express the point location either by entering the
location’s cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by
Point 2 Coordinates List using the Point Select menu to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20,
Solid 10.4.3.1.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example


Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the
Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate
Point ID List
3
1 2
Option: Point
Number of Interior Points
5

Number of Spacing Method Y


◆ Uniform
Z X

◆ Nonuniform

L1 L2

After:
L2/L1 = 2.0

Auto Execute
Point 1 Coordinates List
Point 1
1 3 4 5 6 7 2
Point 2 Coordinates List
Point 2

-Apply-
Y

Z X
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions

Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example


Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes
1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 2

Method: Interpolate
Point ID List
1
1
Option: Point
Number of Interior Points
5

Number of Spacing Method


◆ Uniform Y

◆ Nonuniform
Z X

After:

Auto Execute 5
4
Point 1 Coordinates List 3
Node 1 2
1
Point 2 Coordinates List 1
Node 2

-Apply-

Z X

Point Select Menu Icon


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Interpolating Points on a Curve


The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge
of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created.

Enter the number of interior points you want to create along the
curves or edges that are specified in the Curve listbox.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Method: Interpolate MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Point ID List
5 If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the
point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the
Option: Curve curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran
will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric
Number of Interior Points values of the curve.

Choose either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point


Parameterization Method spacing for the new interior points.

◆ Equal Arc Length If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1,
where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0. The

◆ Equal Parametric Values starting point of where L1 and L2 is measured from is at
the curve’s or edge’s parametric origin, which is defined
Point Spacing Method by its connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction by
choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the
◆ Uniform Geometric Properties form under the menus

◆ Nonuniform Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to create points on,
either by cursor selecting the curves or edges or by
Auto Execute entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that
Curve List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves or edges.

-Apply- ☞ More Help:


• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example


Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the
Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate

Point ID List 5
6
1
Option: Curve
1
Number of Interior Points
5
Y
Parameterization Method
◆ Equal Arc Length Z X

◆ Equal Parametric Values

Point Spacing Method


◆ Uniform

◆ Nonuniform After:

6 7 5
Auto Execute
1 8
Curve List 1
10
Curve 1 9

Y
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example


Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve
option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate 2 3

Point ID List
5

Option: Curve
1
Number of Interior Points
5

Parameterization Method 2
◆ Equal Arc Length 1 Y 1 4

◆ Equal Parametric Values
Z X

Point Spacing Method


◆ Uniform

◆ Nonuniform After:

L1 L2

2 5 6 7 8 9 3
L2/L1 = 2.0

Auto Execute
Curve List 1
Curve 1

-Apply- 2

1 Y 1 4

Z X
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions

Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points


The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities:
Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.
One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within
a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, MSC.Patran will
create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the
Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options.

Geometry Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Action: Create Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Object: Point
Options for 1st entity to intersect:
Method: Intersect 1. Curve (or edge of a surface)
2. Vector
Point ID List
24
Options for 2nd entity to intersect:
Option: <Type> 1. Curve (or edge of a surface)
2. Surface
Option: <Type> 3. Plane

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
<Type> List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.

<Type> List
The <Type> list changes depending on the option selected.
Specify in List 1 and List 2 the pair of intersecting entities at
which to create points, either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1
-Apply- Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1.
The Select menus that appear can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate entities.
The Global Model Tolerance that defines the tolerance
value within which the two entities can intersect is defined
on the Global Preferences form under the
Preferences/Global menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Global Preferences (p. 290) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Intersect Method At An Edge Example


Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge
of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 12

Method: Intersect
16
3
Point ID List 15
17 13

Option: Curve
1
Option: Curve
11
Auto Execute
Curve List Y

Curve 3 X
Z
14
Curve List
Surface 1.2
After:
-Apply- 12

16
3 17
15
13

11

Z X
14
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example


Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List
1
1

Option: Curve

Option: Curve

Auto Execute
Curve List Y 2
Curve 1 Z X

Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-

Y 2
2
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example


Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect,
Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List
1
1 2
Option: Curve

Option: Curve

Auto Execute
Curve List
Y
Curve 1
Z X
Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-

1 2
1 2

Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Surface Example


Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with
Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
6
Method: Intersect 11

Point ID List
1

Option: Curve

Option: Surface

Auto Execute
Z
Curve List Y

Curve 6 X

Surface List
Surface 1
After:

-Apply-

6
1 1
2 1

Z
Y
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Plane Example


Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with
Plane 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List
1 2

Option: Curve
1
Option: Plane

Auto Execute
Curve List Y
Curve 2 Z X

Plane List
Plane 1
After:
-Apply- 1

2 2

3
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example


Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with
Curve 2.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List
1
2
Option: Vector

Option: Curve 1

Auto Execute
Vector List Y
Vector 1 Z X

Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-
1

2 2

3
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example


Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the
entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector
and the Curve.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List
1 2

Option: Vector

Option: Curve

Auto Execute 1
Vector List Y
Vector 1 Z X

Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-

2
1 2

Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Surface Example


Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and
Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List
1
1
Option: Vector

Option: Surface
1
Auto Execute
Vector List Y
Vector 1 Z X
Surface List
Surface 1
After:
-Apply-

1 1

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Plane Example


Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect

Point ID List 2

1
1
Option: Vector

Option: Plane
Y
Auto Execute X
Z
Vector List
Vector 2

Plane List
Plane 1
After:
-Apply-

1 1

Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance


The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space
distance from an existing point on the same curve.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Offset
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Point ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Offset Distance Input the Model Space offset distance from an existing point
on a curve (curve to be input).

Auto Execute Specify the existing points on the curve either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Reference Point List
Example: Point 1 Curve 5.1. The Point Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points or vertices.
Curve/Point List
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curve or edge, along
with a point on the curve which indicates the direction in
which the offset will be taken. For each listbox, the Curve
-Apply- Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the
bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or
edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate
endpoint locations.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Global Preferences (p. 290) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Offset Method Example


Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Offset 1
Point ID List
3

Offset Distance
0.75
1 2
Auto Execute
Reference Point List Y
Point 1
Z X
Curve/Point List
Geometry (Curve 1)

After:
-Apply-

1 2

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points


The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a
surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face.
If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, MSC.Patran will create a
point at each intersection.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Pierce Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Point ID List
1 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve List

Specify in Curve List the existing curves or edges that


Surface List intersect the surfaces and faces listed in the Surface listbox.
Specify in Surface List the existing surfaces or faces that
intersect with the curves and edges.
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1
-Apply- Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curves, edges, surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Pierce Method Example


Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects
Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 14
Method: Pierce

Point ID List
1
15
11
Auto Execute 3 5

Curve List 1 12
Curve 3
Y
Surface List
Surface 1 Z X
13

-Apply-

After:

14

11
3 5
15
1 12

Z X
13
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Point Pierce Method Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and
14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
14
Method: Pierce

Point ID List
1
15

11
Auto Execute 5

Curve List 1 12
Construct 2 Point Curve
Y
Surface List
Surface 1 Z X
13

-Apply-
After:

14

11
5
15
1 12

Z X
13

Curve Select Menu Icon


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces


The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid
face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See
Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions.

Geometry

Action: Create Normal to Surf option will project the existing points by using
Object: Point the normal direction of the specified surface or face.
Define Vector option allows you to specify the coordinates of
Method: Project the Projection Vector and the Refer. Coordinate Frame to
express the vector within. (Example: <1 1 0>). The Vector
Point ID List Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor
5 define the vector direction.
View Vector option will project the existing points by using the
Project onto: Surface view angle of the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the
existing points using the normal direction of the screen.
Option:Normal to Surf

Projection Vector
<0 0 0>

Refer. Coordinate Frame Projection Vector and Refer. Coordinate Frame is used if the
Define Vector option is chosen.
Coord 0

Delete Original Points If ON, after Project completes the existing points specified in
Point List will be deleted from the database.
Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference


Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Projection Vector
<0 0 0>

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Specify in Point List the existing points, vertices, nodes or


Delete Original Points other point locations that you want to project onto the surfaces
or faces specified in the Surface List box.
Auto Execute Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the
points will be projected onto.
Point List
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For points - Point 1:10,
Curve 5.1 Surface 5.1.1; For surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
Surface List The Point Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes, surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Viewing Menu (p. 219) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Project Method With Normal to Surf Option Example


Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16,
18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is
pressed in.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10
Object: Point
Method: Project
11
15
Point ID List 16
21 14

Project onto: Surface 1 1


13
Option: Normal to Surf
18
Projection Vector Y 209
19
<0 0 0> ZX
12
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0

After:
Delete Original Points

Auto Execute 10

Point List
11
Point 13:16 18:20 Node 1 23
24
Surface List 22

Surface 10
1
21
-Apply-
26
Y 28 9
27
ZX
12
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Point Project Method With Define Vector Option Example


Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points
are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector <-1 0 1> that is expressed within the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Project 10 11
15
Point ID List 16 14
13 Y

Project onto: Surface 1


17 1
Z X 13

Option: Define Vector


18 20
Y 19
Projection Vector
9 12
<-1 0 1> Z X

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 1

After:
Delete Original Points

Auto Execute
Point List 10 11
23
Point 13:20
24 22
Surface List
Y
Surface 1
25 21 1 1
Z X

-Apply-
26 28
Y 27
9 12
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point Project Method With View Vector Option Example


Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are
projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete
Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create
Object: Point
10 11
Method: Project
15
Point ID List 16 14

21 Y

1
17 1
Z X 13
Project onto: Surface

Option: View Vector 18 20


Y 19
Projection Vector 9 12
Z X
<0 0 0>

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0
After:
Delete Original Points

Auto Execute
10 11
Point List
23
Point 13:20
24 22
Surface List Y

Surface 1 1
25 1
Z X 21

-Apply- 26 28
Y 27
9 12
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curves Between Points


Creating Curves Through 2 Points
The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two
existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Option: 2 Point Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Specify the starting and ending point locations for the new
curves. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20,
Ending Point List
Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Point Method With 2 Point Option Example


Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point
10
Curve ID List
3

Option: 2 Point

Auto Execute
Starting Point List
1
Point 1 Y

Ending Point List Z X


Node 10

-Apply-
After:

2
10

1
Y

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curves Through 3 Points


The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through
three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the
ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices,
nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: 3 Point
Parameterization Method
◆ Parametric Position Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u )
parametric position of the middle point for the new curve, either

◆ Chord Length by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox
where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order
0.0 1.0 of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and
0.5
Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity.
u Value of Middle Point You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,
MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the
points along the curve, based on the chord length distances
relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means
the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized,
depending on where the interior points are located.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Parameterization Method
◆ Parametric Position

◆ Chord Length
0.0 1.0
0.5

u Value of Middle Point By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Starting Point List

Middle Point List Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the
new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that
Ending Point List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example


Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and
2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Curve ID List
1

Option: 3 Point
Parameterization Method 2
◆ Parametric Position

◆ Chord Length 1
Y
0.0 1.0
0.5
Z X
u Value of Middle Point

Auto Execute
Starting Point List After:
Point 1

Middle Point List 10

Point 2
Ending Point List
Node 10

-Apply-
1
2

1
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at ξ 1 ( u )
=0.75, instead of 0.5.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10
Object: Curve
Method: Point

Curve ID List
1

Option: 3 Point
2
Parameterization Method
◆ Parametric Position
1

◆ Chord Length Y

0.0 1.0
0.75 Z X

u Value of Middle Point

Auto Execute
After:
Starting Point List
Point 1 10
Middle Point List
Point 2
Ending Point List
Node 10

-Apply- 2

1
Y

1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curves Through 4 Points


The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through
four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending
point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or
other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method
◆ Parametric Position Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric
◆ position of the second and third points on the new curve, where
◆ Chord Length
0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Press the Parametric Positions button to enter the ξ 1
locations for both points. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order
[Parametric Positions...] of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending
Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot
Auto Execute the curve’s ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display
Starting Point List Properties/Geometric.
Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,
MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points
Second Point List along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the
locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or
may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior
points are located.
Third Point List

Ending Point List

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method
◆ Parametric Position

◆ Chord Length

[Parametric Positions...]
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Starting Point List

Second Point List Specify the starting, second, third and ending point locations for
the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that
Third Point List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Ending Point List

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example


Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and
3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.667.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 10

Method: Point

Curve ID List
3
1

Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method 2
◆ Parametric Position

◆ Chord Length 1
Y
[Parametric Positions...]
Z X
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1 After:
Second Point List
10
Point 2

Third Point List


Point 3
3
Ending Point List
Node 10 1

2
-Apply-

1
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25
and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80.

Geometry Before
Action: Create
Object: Curve 10

Method: Point

Curve ID List
3 3

Option: 4 Point
Parameterization Method 2
◆ Parametric Position

◆ Chord Length Y
1

[Parametric Positions...]
Z X

Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1 After:
Second Point List
10
Point 2

Third Point List


Point 3
3
Ending Point List
Node 10
1
2
-Apply-
1
Y

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions Subordinate Form


This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the
Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option.

Enter the ξ 1 (C1) parametric position for


Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions the second and third point locations that are
0.0 1.0 specified in the Second Point List and Third
0.333 Point Listboxes, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . This
defines where these two points will occupy
u Parametric Value of second point on the new curve. Either use the slide bars
or enter the ξ 1 value in each databox.
Moving the slidebar will automatically
0.0 1.0 0.667 update the databox value.
Press OK to update the ξ 1 values.
Press Cancel if you want to exit the form
u Parametric Value of third point and not change the specified ξ 1 values.
The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order of
OK Cancel the point locations specified in the Starting
Point List and Ending Point List, which
defines the new curve’s connectivity. You
can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves
by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the
☞ More Help: menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method)


The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point
locations. MSC.Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the
arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are
provided on the Point select menu.

If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at


the center location of the arc.

Geometry
Action: Create
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Object: Curve created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Arc3Point

Curve ID List
1
If PATRAN 2 Convention is pressed, enter the number of curves
Curves per Arc to be created for each arc definition. Otherwise, the Curves pre
1 Arc databox is disabled.

Create Center Point


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Starting Point List

Middle Point List


Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the
new arc to pass through. Either cursor select the point
Ending Point List locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point
1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations.
-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Arc3Point Method Example


Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1
through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
2
Method: Arc3Point

Curve ID List
3

Curves per Arc


1

Create Center Point Y


3 1
Auto Execute Z X
Starting Point List
Point 1

Middle Point List


Point 2 After:
Ending Point List
Point 3
2

-Apply-

Y
3 4 1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Arc3Point Method Example


This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are
specified with point coordinate locations.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Arc3Point

Curve ID List
3

Curves per Arc


1

Create Center Point


Y
Auto Execute
Z X
Starting Point List
[-1 0 0]

Middle Point List


[0 1 0] After:
Ending Point List
[1 0 0]
2

-Apply-

Y
3 4 1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Chained Curves


The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges.
The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create
planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained
curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the
Create/Surface/Trimmed form.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Method: Chain created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1
If selected, the Auto Chaining form is displayed to enable
Auto Chain... auto chaining of existing curves.

Delete Constituent Curves


If ON, after Chain completes, the existing curves specified in
the Curve List will be deleted from the database.
Curve List

Specify the existing curves or edges to chain either by cursor


selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
-Apply- Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
• Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)
• Disassembling a Chained Curve (p. 429)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Chain Method Example


Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10.
Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
8 9 7 4 5 3
Object: Curve
Method: Chain 8 6

Curve ID List 5
6 7
11 10 4

Auto Chain...
Delete Constituent Curves

Curve List 1 3 2
Curve 3:10
Y

-Apply- Z X

After:

8 7 4 11 3

6 5

1 2

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Conic Curves


The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is,
hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and
ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Method: Conic created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1

Used by the Focal Point List and the Starting and Ending Point
Refer. Coordinate Frame Lists to express the point’s coordinate values that may be entered
Coord 0 within the specified coordinate frame. Example: Coord 5. Default
is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Conic Section Classification


0.0 1.0
0.5 Enter a value for the altitude of the conic either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox.
Conic Altitude for Parabola

Focal Point

Conic Conic Curve


Altitude

Starting Point Ending Point


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Conic Section Classification


0.0 1.0
0.5

Conic Altitude for Parabola

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Focal Point List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Starting Point List

Specify the focal point location, and the starting and ending point
locations that defines a conic section. Either cursor select the
Ending Point List point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Conic Method Example


Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and
ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 3
Object: Curve
Method: Conic

Curve ID List
1

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Conic Section Classification Y


0.0 1.0
0.5 Z X

Conic Altitude for Parabola 1 2

Auto Execute
After:
Focal Point List
Point 3 3

Starting Point List


Point 1

Ending Point List


Point 2

1
-Apply-

Z X
1 2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Conic Method Example


This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from
0.50 for Curve 2.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
3
Object: Curve
Method: Conic

Curve ID List
2

Refer. Coordinate Frame 1

Coord 0

Conic Section Classification


0.0 1.0 Y
0.75
Z X
Conic Altitude for Parabola 1 2

Auto Execute
Focal Point List After:
Point 3
3
Starting Point List
Point 1

Ending Point List 2

Point 2

1
-Apply-

Z X
1 2
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Extracting Curves From Surfaces


Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option
The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the
surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1
and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 .

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Extract

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: Parametric
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
Choose either Constant u Direction or Constant v

◆ v Direction Direction. The curves will either be created along either
the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the
Curve Position ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.
0.0 1.0
0.5

v Parametric Value Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value for


the location of the curve, either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions
are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can
plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric
Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the
menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Direction
◆ u Direction

◆ v Direction

Curve Position
0.0 1.0
0.5

v Parametric Value By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Auto Execute the form.

Surface List

Specify the existing surfaces or faces for the curves to be


created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the
-Apply- IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The
Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example


Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2
at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
7 1
Object: Curve 2
Method: Extract

Curve ID List
1
8
Option: Parametric 2
10
Curve Direction

◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction Y

Curve Position X
Z 9
0.0 1.0
0.75

v Parametric Value
After:
Auto Execute
7 1
Surface List 2
Surface 2

11
-Apply- 1
8
2
10
1

Y
12
X 9
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75,
instead of ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
7 1
Object: Curve 2

Method: Extract

Curve ID List
1
8
Option: Parametric 2
10
Curve Direction

◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction
◆ Y

Curve Position Z
X 9
0.0 1.0
0.75

v Parametric Value After:

Auto Execute
7 1
Surface List 2

Surface 2

-Apply-
8
2 11
1 10

Y
12
X 9
Z
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example


Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface
1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
3
Object: Curve
Method: Extract

Curve ID List
1 2
3

Option: Parametric
5
Curve Direction 6
1
◆ u Direction

2
◆ v Direction
Y

Curve Position Z X
0.0 1.0 7
0.25

v Parametric Value
After:
Auto Execute 3

Surface List
Construct2CurveSurface(Ev
8
1 2
-Apply-
3
5

6
1 9
2
Y

Z X
7

Surface Select Menu Icons


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option


The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Extract Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: Edge
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Edge List the form.

Specify in Edge List, the existing edges of the surfaces or solid


faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting
-Apply- them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1.1 Solid 5.1.1.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Extract Method With Edge Option Example


Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges
of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 5

Method: Extract

Curve ID List
3
6
1
2 1
Option: Edge 2
1
Auto Execute
Edge List
Surface 1.2 Y
3
X 4
-Apply- Z

After:

1
5

6
1
2 1
2
1

Y
3
X 4
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Fillet Curves


The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc.
For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran
2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a
single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Fillet created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1
Curves per Fillet specifies the number of curves you want to
Fillet Parameters create for each defined fillet arc. This is only used in conjunction
with the Patran 2 Convention.
Curves per Fillet
Fillet Radius specifies a real value for the radius of the fillet arc.
1 Only one radius value is allowed which is applied to all specified
curves or edges/points that are entered in the Curve/Point 1 and
Fillet Radius
2 Lists.
Fillet Tolerance specifies the accuracy MSC.Patran uses when
Fillet Tolerance it subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position.
Decreasing the value helps when the fillet is very small
0.005 compared to the geometry. This is only used in conjunction with
the Patran 2 Convention.
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original curves specified in the
Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the
Curve/Point 1 List tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original curve.

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-
Calculated Curve 1 Endpoint
Center
Radius
New Fillet
Curve Portions to Trim

Curve 2
Endpoint
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1

Fillet Radius

Fillet Tolerance
0.005

Trim Original Curves


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to Press the Apply button to execute the form.
Curve/Point 1 List

Curve/Point 2 List Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the existing
pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the fillet will
be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and
the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to
cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points,
-Apply- vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Fillet Method Example


Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and
Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed.

Before:
Geometry

Action: Create 1

Object: Curve
Method: Fillet 6

Curve ID List
3
1 2
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
5
1

Fillet Radius
0.5 Y 4

Fillet Tolerance
Z X
0.005

Trim Original Curves


After:
Auto Execute
1
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
6
Curve/Point 2 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

-Apply- 8 3
2
7
5

1
Y 4

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Fillet Method Example


Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and
Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 3

Method: Fillet
2
1
Curve ID List
3 4

Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1

Fillet Radius
2 Y
0.25
X Z
Fillet Tolerance 1
0.005

Trim Original Curves


Auto Execute After:
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 3 6
Curve/Point 2 List
3 2
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 1

5 4
-Apply-

2 Y

X Z
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points


The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point
locations. MSC.Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The
point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point
select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Object:
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Fit Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List
1 Number of Curves to Create specifies the number of curves to
create to represent the fit through the specified points.
Fit Parameters Convergence Tolerance is used when the Number of Iterations
Number of Curves to Create is greater than zero. This value, measured in model units,
defines the maximum the interior points will deviate from a
1 calculated spline of the original curves that are used in the
synthesis of the new curves. Default is .005.
Convergence Tolerance
Number of Iterations is zero by default. If zero, MSC.Patran will
0.005 create smooth, evenly parameterized curves. If it is greater than
zero, as the value increases, the curve fit will be more accurate,
Number of Iterations
but they will become more nonuniformly parameterized and they
0 may have unwanted kinks or oscillations.

Point List Specify the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations to fit the curve through, either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations.
Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
-Apply- appropriate point locations.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Fit Method Example


Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created
through Points 1 through 6.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Fit 6
2
Curve ID List
1 3
5
Fit Parameters
1
Number of Curves to Create 4
3
Y
Convergence Tolerance
0.005 Z X

Number of Iterations
0

Point List After:


Point 1: 6

-Apply-
6
2
7
3 3
5

1 2
8
4

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Curves at Intersections


Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces
The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces
or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: 2 Surface
If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
Option:
Intersect Parameters... (p. 157) for more information.

Auto Execute
Surface 1 List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Surface 2 List

Specify the existing pair of intersecting surfaces or solid


faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by
-Apply- cursor selecting them. Examples: Surface 10 Solid 10.1.
The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is
located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 4 6
2
Method: Intersect

Curve ID List
1 2
1
Option: 2 Surface

Intersect Parameters...
3
Auto Execute Y
Surface 1 List
5
Surface 1 Z X
1
Surface 2 List
Surface 2 After:

-Apply- 4 6
2

2
1
7

3
Y

5
Z X
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example


This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by
Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create
Surface 2.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 3
8
Method: Intersect 4
2
Curve ID List
4

Option: 2 Surface
1

Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List Y
2 3
Surface 1
Z 7
X
Surface 2 List 1

Construct 2CurveSurface
After:
-Apply- 3
8
4
2

9 1

Y
2 3
Z 7
X
1
Surface Select Menu Icon
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the
intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect

Curve ID List
1 4

1
Option: 2 Surface

Intersect Parameters...
Auto Execute
Y
Surface 1 List
Surface 1 Z X

Surface 2 List
Surface 4
After:

-Apply-

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface


The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined
plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect
each other.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Method: Intersect
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1
If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
Option: Plane-Surface (p. 157) for more information.

Intersect Parameters... By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Plane List

Specify in Plane List, one or more plane definitions that


intersect with the specified surfaces or faces, either by
Surface List entering the vector coordinates or by cursor defining them
using the Vector Select menu. Examples: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]},
Coord 0.1.
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or solid faces
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor
-Apply- selecting them. The Surface Select menu can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces
or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Intersect Method With Plane-Surface Option Example


Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is
defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
3
1

Option: Plane-Surface 1

Intersect Parameters... 1
Auto Execute
Plane List Y

{[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}


Z X 4
Surface List
Surface 1
After:

-Apply- 2

5 3

1 6

Z X 4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Intersect Method With the Plane-Surface Option Example


Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is
defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 6

Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
1
Z
2 T
Option: Plane-Surface 1 R

Intersect Parameters...

Auto Execute
Y
Plane List
Coord 1.3 Z X

Surface List 5

Surface 2
After:
-Apply- 6

Z
2
1
1 TR
7

Z X

5
Axis Select Menu Icon

3
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form


The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is
pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form.

Intersect Parameters
Curves per Intersection Active if PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON, on the
Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Specify the
0 number of parametric cubic curves to create at each
intersection.
Max. Deviation Tolerance
0.005
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve
Intersect Tolerance intersection using a tolerance based cubic spline.

0.05
Used by MSC.Patran to determine how many points to
create to represent the curve intersection.
OK Cancel

☞ More Help:
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes


This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes.
Geometry Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Geometry
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Action: Create Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Object: Curve If ON, MSC.Patran will create parametric cubic curves.


Method: Intersect Otherwise, the new curves will be a Straight Line geometry
type. Parametric cubic geometry is supported by the PATRAN
Curve ID List 2 Neutral File for import or export.

1
If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in
Curve Type model units. By default, the length is calculated from the
current viewport limits to simulate an infinite construction entity.
PATRAN 2 Convention If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called
Length Calculation Points will appear. You must enter the point
Option: 2 Plane locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes that the curve length
will be calculated from.
Curve Length Once the points have been entered, press the Calculate
Curve Length button to display the curve length in the databox
Input Length based on Distance, Deltax, Deltay, Deltaz selections
Calculate Length
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
6.9282 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Distance Deltay
Specify in Plane 1 List, one or more plane definitions that
Deltax Deltaz intersect with the specified planes in Plane 2 List, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
Calculate Curve Length them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate planes. Examples:
Coord 0.1, Plane 1
Auto Execute
Specify in Plane 2 List, one or more plane definitions that
Plane 1 List intersect with the specified planes in Plane 1 List, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate planes.
Plane 2 List

☞ More Help:
-Apply- • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curve Intersect from Two Planes Example


Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2.

Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create Before:
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect

Curve ID List 1
1

Curve Type
PATRAN 2 Convention
2
Option: 2 Plane
Curve Length
Input Length
Y
Calculate Length
Z X
0.334

Distance Deltay After:


Deltax Deltaz

Calculate Curve Length

Auto Execute
Plane 1 List
Plane 1
1
Plane 2 List
Plane 2 2

-Apply-

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Manifold Curves Onto a Surface


Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option
The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of
surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie
on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option:
Manifold Parameters...
Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When this toggle is
Option: 2 Point pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form
Auto Execute (p. 167) for more information.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Option: 2 Point

Auto Execute
Surface List

Starting Point List Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the
new curves will lie on, either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select
menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.
Ending Point List Specify in Starting Point List and Ending Point List, the
existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10,
Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
-Apply- surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option Example


Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The
curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold 5

Curve ID List 2
8
1
4
Option:
Manifold Parameters... 1
6
Option: 2 Point

Auto Execute
Y 7
Surface List
X
Surface 1 Z

Starting Point List


Point 7
After:
Ending Point List
Point 2 5 8

5
-Apply-
2
8

4
1
6

4 2

Y 7

X
Z
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option On a Face Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5
and 12.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
6
Method: Manifold
Curve ID List 12
1 9 7
1
Option:
Manifold Parameters... 1

Option: 2 Point 10
8 5
Auto Execute Y
Z
X
Surface List
Surface 1.5
11
Starting Point List
Point 5
After:
Ending Point List
Point 12
6

-Apply-
12
9 7
1
1
1
10
8 5
Y
Z
X

11
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option


The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using
two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face
and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point
select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Method: Manifold
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
4

Option:
Manifold Parameters... Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When the Manifold
Parameters... button is pressed, the Manifold Parameters
Option: N-Points subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters
Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.

Surface

Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that you


want to create curves on, either by entering the IDs from the
Point List keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select
menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.
Specify in Point List the existing point locations either by entering
the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples:
Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu
-Apply- can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1
through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold 5
8
Curve ID List
6
1 17
1
Option:
Manifold Parameters...
18 4
Option: N-Points
7
Surface Y

Surface 1
Z X
Point List
Point 5 8 17 18 4

After:
-Apply-

5
8
6
17
1
1
18 4

7
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option On a Face Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top
face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 6

Method: Manifold
12
Curve ID List
9 7
1
1
13
1
Option:
Manifold Parameters...
Option: N-Points 10
8 5
Surface
Solid 1.5 Y
Z
X
Point List 11

Point 6 12 13 5

After:
-Apply-

12
9 1 7
1
13
1

10
8 5

Y
Z
X
11
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form


The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is
ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application
form.

Manifold Parameters
Curves per Manifold
0 Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create
between each pair of points (for the 2 Point option) or
Manifold Tolerance through a set of given points (for the N-Points option).
0.005
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the manifold using
a tolerance based cubic spline.
OK Cancel

☞ More Help:
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal


Method)
The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to
a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Normal
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Auto Execute
Specify in Point List, the existing point locations, either by
Point List entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining
them using the Point Select menu. Examples: Point 1 10,
Curve 5.2.
Curve List Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
them. Examples: Curve 10, Solid 5.2.1. The Curve Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges.
-Apply-

Point

New Curve
Original Curve

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Normal Method Example


Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally
to the edge of Curve 5.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Normal 13
Method:
Curve ID List
6
12
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 13

Curve List 5
Y
Curve 5
Z X

-Apply-

After:

13

14 12

5
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Normal Method From An Edge Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally
to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
17
Object: Curve 16

Method: Normal

Curve ID List
1

Auto Execute
4
Point List
Point 20

Curve List 20
Y
Curve 4
Z X 19
18
-Apply-

After:
17
16

20
Y
1
Z X 19
18 21
Curve Select Menu Icon
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Offset Curves


Creating Constant Offset Curve
This form is used to create a constant offset curve.

Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Specify the Offset Curve type to create:
1. Constant Offset
2. Variable Offset

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
Specify the constant offset value of the curve.
1.0

Repeat Count Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using
the Repeat Count parameter.
1
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Curve List the form.
Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either
by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu
Draw Direction Vector that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves.
Reverse Direction
Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset
Reset Graphics
curve from.

Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the


-Apply- offset curve from.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Constant Offset Curve Example


Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3.

Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset

1
Curve ID List
2

Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
.5

Repeat Count Y

3 Z X

Auto Execute
After:
Curve List
Curve 1

Draw Direction Vector


Reverse Direction
4
Reset Graphics
3

-Apply-
2

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Variable Offset Curve


This form is used to create a variable offset curve.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve Specify the Offset Curve type to create:
Method: Offset 1. Constant Offset
2. Variable Offset

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be


created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Specify the start offset value of the curve.
Offset Parameters Specify the end offset value of the curve.
Start Value Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using
1.0 the Repeat Count parameter.

End Value Specify the Parameterization Control of the offset curve.


1.0 Parameter Value: Defines the parametric values of the start
and end offset distances.
Repeat Count Arc Length: Function of arc length.
1
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
[Parameterization Control...] means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Auto Execute Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either
by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
Curve List keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves.

Draw Direction Vector Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset
curve from.
Reverse Direction
Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the
Reset Graphics offset curve from.

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve


This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types;
Arc Length and Parameter Value.

Parameterization Control
Arc Length Select the Parameterization Method for the
Parameter Value offset curve. (Arc Length is Default )

0.0 1.0 0.0

Start Parameter Value

0.0 1.0 1.0

End Parameter Value

OK Cancel

Define the start and end Parameter Values for the start and end distance of
the offset curve by using the slidebar or entering the value in the databox.
The start Parameter Value must be less than the End Parameter Value.
(Used for when the Parameterization Method is Parameter Value.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Variable Offset Curve Example


Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1.
Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0.

Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset

Curve ID List
2

Offset Parameters
Start Value
0.25

End Value Y
1.0 Z X

Repeat Count
1
After:

[Parameterization Control...]

Auto Execute
Curve List
3
Curve 1

Draw Direction Vector 2

Reverse Direction

Reset Graphics 1

-Apply- Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces


The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined
projection vector, onto a surface or solid face.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Project
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Curve ID List
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option:
Project Parameters...

Option: Normal to Plane


If pressed, the Project Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Project Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 182) for more information.

Available options are:


Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected
through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that
define a plane.
Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected
through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in
Surface List.
Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates
entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the
Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <1 1 0>. The Vector Select menu will
appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition.
View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the
current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the
normal direction of the screen.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

If ON, after Project completes, the existing curves specified in Curve


List will be deleted from the database.

Option: Normal to Plane

Projection Vector
Used if the Define Vector option is chosen. Either enter the
<0 0 0> vector coordinates that are expressed in the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, or use the Vector Select Menu that
Refer. Coordinate Frame appears to cursor define the projection vector.

Coord 0
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Delete Original Curves means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Auto Execute
Curve List Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges that you
want to project onto the surfaces or faces listed in Surface
List.
Surface List Specify in Surface List, the surfaces or faces that the curves
or edges will be projected onto.
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1:10,
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
-Apply- The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges, and surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• Viewing Menu (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Project Method With the Normal to Plane Option Example


Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from
Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
13
Object: Curve
Method: Project

Curve ID List 5
2
7 15

6
Option:
Project Parameters...
Option: Normal to Plane

Projection Vector
Y
<0 0 0>
Z X
Refer. Coordinate Frame 12
14
Coord 0

Delete Original Curves After:

Auto Execute 13

Curve List
Curve 6

5
Surface List 15
2 16
Surface 2
6 7

-Apply-

Z X
12
14
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Project Method With the Normal to Surf Option Example


Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from
Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is
deleted.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 13
Object: Curve
Method: Project

Curve ID List 5
2
15 16
8
6 7
Option:
Project Parameters...
Option: Normal to Surf

Projection Vector
Y
<0 0 0>
Z X
Refer. Coordinate Frame 12
14
Coord 0

Delete Original Curves After:

Auto Execute 13

Curve List
Curve 6
5
Surface List 2 16
Surface 2
7
17
8
-Apply-

Z X
12
14
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Project Method With Define Vector Option Example


Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface
2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon
listed below.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 13
Object: Curve
Method: Project

Curve ID List 2
7
19
6 20
Option:
Project Parameters...
Option: Define Vector

Projection Vector
Y
Construct2PointVector

Refer. Coordinate Frame Z X 12


14
Coord 0

Delete Original Curves After:


Auto Execute 13

Curve List
Curve 6

Surface List 2

Surface 2 19 21
20
7

-Apply-

Z X 12
14

Vector Select Menu Icon


CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Project Method With View Vector Option Example


Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface
2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
and Curve 6 is deleted.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 13
Object: Curve
Method: Project

Curve ID List
2
7

Option: 6
Project Parameters...
Option: View Vector

Projection Vector
Y
Construct2PointVector

Refer. Coordinate Frame Z X


12
14
Coord 0

Delete Original Curves After:


Auto Execute 13

Curve List
Curve 6

Surface List 2
15
Surface 2
7

-Apply-

Z X
12
14
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Project Parameters Subordinate Form


The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed
on the Create/Curve/Project application form.

Project Parameters
Curves per Projection
Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on
0 the Create/Curve/Project form. If PATRAN 2 Convention
is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to
Projection Tolerance create for a given projection location.
0.005
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve
projection location using a tolerance based cubic spline.
OK Cancel

☞ More Help:
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Piecewise Linear Curves


The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves
between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or
other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: PWL

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point


-Apply- locations to connect the curves between, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor
selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10,
Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point locations.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve PWL Method Example


Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves
are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.

Before:
Geometry

Action: Create 17 18
13 14
Object: Curve
Method: PWL
15
16
Curve ID List
5

Point List 12 1

Point 12: 18 Node 1

Y
-Apply-
Z X

After:

17 10 18
13 6 14

7 9

15 8 16 11
5

12 1
19

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Spline Curves


Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option
The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves
that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually
between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Curve
Spline Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Method:
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Curve ID List
Functions.
1

Option: Loft Spline


Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
Curves per Spline of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.
0

End Point Slope Control

Auto Execute
If ON, End Point Slope Control allows you to use the Start and
End Point Tangent Vector databoxes to define the tangent
vector for the slopes at the spline’s start point and end point
locations.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference


Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

End Point Slope Control Used if End Point Slope Control toggle is ON.
Specify in Start Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition
Auto Execute of the slope at the first point listed in Point List.
Start Point Tangent Vector Specify in End Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of
the slope at the last point listed in Point List.
You can either enter the vector coordinates that are
expressed in the global rectangular frame, Coord 0
End Point Tangent Vector (Example: <1.5 0 0>); or you can use the Vector Select menu
that appears to cursor define the slope’s vector.

Point List
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to
define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point
-Apply- 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point
locations.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is
created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in,
Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 2
1
Method: Spline

Curve ID List 3
1

5
Option: Loft Spline

Curves per Spline


4
0
Y
End Point Slope Control

Auto Execute Z X

Start Point Tangent Vector

End Point Tangent Vector After:

2
1
Point List
Point 1:5 3

1
-Apply- 5

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point
Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the
End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed
below.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
1
Method: Spline
Curve ID List 3
1
1
Option:Loft Spline 5

Curves per Spline


0 4

End Point Slope Control


Y
Auto Execute
Start Point Tangent Vector Z X

Construct 2PointVector

End Point Tangent Vector


Construct 2PointVector After:

2
Point List
1
Point 1:5

3
-Apply-
21
5

Z X

Vector Select Menu Icon


CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option


The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations.
MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can
be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Spline Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Curve ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: B-Spline

Curves per Spline Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

B-Spline Parameters
2 10
Specify for Order, the B-Spline’s order of the polynomials. As Order
increases, MSC.Patran will create an increasingly smoother spline.
Order MSC.Patran will not create the spline if Order is greater than the
number of points listed in Point List.
Interpolation If Interpolation is ON, MSC.Patran will force the spline through the
given points. If it is OFF, the spline will only pass through the first
Closed
and last points.
If Closed is ON, MSC.Patran will created a closed spline. If it is
OFF, the spline will be open ended.
Parametrization Method
◆ Chord Length If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points

◆ Uniform along the B-spline is based on the chord length distances relative to
the locations of the spline’s interior points. This means the curve may
or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the
Point List interior points are located.
If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the
B-spline will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the specified
points in the Point List are located. That is, the curve will be always
uniformly parameterized.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
other point locations to define the spline,
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
either by entering the IDs from the
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
keyboard or by cursor selecting the point
locations. Examples: Point 1:10, • Topology (p. 10)
Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
menu can be used to define how you • Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran
want to cursor select the appropriate Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example


Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1
through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the
points.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
1
Method: Spline

Curve ID List 3
1

5
Option: B-Spline
Curves per Spline
0 4

B-Spline Parameters Y
3 10
Z X
Order

Interpolation
After:
Closed

Parametrization Method 2
◆ Chord Length 1

◆ Uniform
3
Point List 1

Point 1:5 5

-Apply- 4

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three,
instead of five.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 2
Method: Spline 1

Curve ID List
3
2
1
Option: B-Spline 5
Curves per Spline
0
4
B-Spline Parameters
5 10 Y

Z X
Order

Interpolation
Closed After:

Parametrization Method
2
◆ Chord Length
1

◆ Uniform

Point List 3
1
Point 1:5
5

-Apply-
4

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3
is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
2
Method: Spline 1

Curve ID List
3 3
1
Option: B-Spline 5
Curves per Spline
0
4
B-Spline Parameters
5 10 Y

Z X
Order

Interpolation
Closed After:

Parametrization Method 2
◆ Chord Length 1

◆ Uniform
3
Point List
1
Point 1:5
5

-Apply-
4

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method)


The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two
existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be
able to find the tangent location on each curve.

Geometry
Action: Create
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Object: Curve created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: TanCurve
Curve ID List
1 If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve/Point 1
and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the
end of the original curve.
Trim Original Curves

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Curve/Point 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

Curve/Point 2 List
Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the
pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the
new curve will be created between.
For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select
-Apply- menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define
the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices,
nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

New Curve
Original Curve 1

Portions To Be Trimmed

Original Curve 2

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve TanCurve Method Example


Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9
and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim
Original Curves is pressed.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanCurve 8
9
Curve ID List
10
23 25
Trim Original Curves

Auto Execute
26 28
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPoint CurveUOn Curve Y

Curve/Point 2 List Z X
ConstructPoint CurveUOnCurve

-Apply- After:

30
10
29 8

9
23 25

26 28

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points


(TanPoint Method)
The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point
location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will
not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other
point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Method: TanPoint created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1
If Closest Tangent Only is chosen, the new curve will be
created at the closest tangent point to the existing point
location.
Closest Tangent Only
If All Tangents is chosen, MSC.Patran will preview each
Trim Original Curves curve to be created at all possible tangent points and ask if you
want to create a curve at each possible location.
Auto Execute
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve List.
Point List Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the
original curve.

Curve List

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Closest Tangent Only


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Trim Original Curves
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Auto Execute
the form.
Point List
Specify in Point List, the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
Curve List (Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or by cursor
selecting the location using the Point Select menu.
Specify in Curve List, the curves or edges either by entering
the IDs or by cursor selecting them using the Curve Select
menu. Examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1.
-Apply-

New Curve
Original Curve

Portion to trim
Point

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Curve TanPoint Method Example


Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and
Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanPoint 9

Curve ID List
10
25

Closest Tangent Only 26 28

Trim Original Curves Y

Auto Execute
Z X
Point List
Point 25

Curve List
Curve 9 After:

-Apply-
29
9 10

25

26 28

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve TanPoint Method Example


Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and
an edge of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanPoint 1
1
Curve ID List
1

5 2

Closest Tangent Only


Trim Original Curves 9

Auto Execute Y 6

Point List
Z X
Point 9

Curve List
Curve 1.2 After:

-Apply-

1
1

10

2
5
1

Y 6

Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length


(XYZ Method)
The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector
length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex,
node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.

Method: XYZ
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve,
<Type> ID List surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in
1 the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector
Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the
Coord 0 specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular
frame, Coord 0.
Vector Coordinates List Enter the vector coordinates to define the lengths and direction
for the new curves, surfaces or solids. Enter the coordinates
<1 0 0>
either from the keyboard (example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define
the vector using the Vector Select menu that appears.
Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Origin Coordinates List
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
[0 0 0] the form.

Specify the origin or starting point location of the new curve,


surface or solid. You can express the origin’s point location
-Apply- either by entering the cartesian coordinates from the
keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select
the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.3.1.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve XYZ Method Example


Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose
vector orientation and length is <20 10 0>.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: XYZ

Curve ID List
3

Refer. Coordinate Frame


6
Coord 0

Vector Coordinates List


Y
<20 10 0>

X
Auto Execute Z

Origin Coordinates List


Point 6 After:

-Apply-

Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface XYZ Method Example


Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose
vector orientation and length is <20 10 5>.

Geometry
Before:

Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: XYZ

Surface ID List
3

Refer. Coordinate Frame


6
Coord 0

Vector Coordinates List


Y
<20 10 5>

Z X
Auto Execute
Origin Coordinates List
Point 6 After:

7
-Apply-

8
3
6

Z X
9
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid XYZ Method Example


Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20
10 5> which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: XYZ

Solid ID List
1

Refer. Coordinate Frame 6


Coord 0

Vector Coordinates List


Y
<20 10 5>

Z X
Auto Execute
Origin Coordinates List
Point 6 After:
7
-Apply-
11

1 12
6

10

Y
9

Z X
13
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Involute Curves


Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option
The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point
location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended
for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Involute
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: Angles
Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
0.0
Starting angle for involute Specify in Angle to unwind the involute, the angle in degrees
0.0 to unwind the involute.
Curves per Point Specify in Starting angle for involute, the starting angle in
degrees of the involute curve.
1
Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the
total involute. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2
Refer. Coordinate Frame Convention.
Coord 0

Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the
plane the involute curve will be in.
Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the
Auto Execute
Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular
Point List frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector
Select menu and cursor define the vector definition.

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
0.0
Starting angle for involute
0.0
Curves per Point
1

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Involute Axis Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.

Auto Execute
Point List Specify the existing point, vertex, node or other point
location that defines the starting point of the involute, either
by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node
-Apply- 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate point location.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve Involute Method With the Angles Option Example


Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the
curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Involute
Curve ID List
5 13

Option: Angles
Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
360
Y
Starting angle for involute
0.0 Z X
Curves per Point
4

Refer. Coordinate Frame


After:
Coord 0

Involute Axis 15
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} 6
7

Auto Execute 14
Point List 5
13
Point 13
16

-Apply-

Y 8

Z X
17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option


The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point
location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu.
Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended
for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin
and the radius of the stop of the curve.

Geometry ☞ More Help:


Action: Create • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
Object: Curve
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
Method: Involute • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
Curve ID List • Topology (p. 10)
1 • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Option: Radii
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Involute Parameters created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Base radius of the bobbin Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
0.0
Radius of the stop
0.0 Specify in Base radius of the bobbin, the base radius, in model
units, of the bobbin.
Curves per Point
Specify in Radius of the Stop, the radius of the stop of the
1 involute curve.
Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the
Refer. Coordinate Frame total involute.
Coord 0

Involute Axis Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane
the involute curve will be in.
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the
Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame,
Auto Execute Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu
and cursor define the vector definition.
Point List
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
-Apply-
Specify the point, vertex, node or other point location that
defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the
ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location.
Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point location.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve Involute Method With the Radii Option Example


Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the
curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute
axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Involute
Curve ID List
5 13

Option: Radii
Involute Parameters
Base radius of the bobbin
0.1
Radius of the stop Y

2
Z X
Curves per Point
6

Refer. Coordinate Frame


After:
Coord 0

Involute Axis 18 9
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
14
Auto Execute
6 5
Point List
10 17
Point 13

13
-Apply-
15

8
Y
19
Z X 7
16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids


The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface
location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations
can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can
be surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve,
Surface or Solid.
Method: Revolve

<Type> ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next entity type to
1 be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0
Specify in Axis, the coordinate values of the rotation vector
Axis that will be expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame
(default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example:
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} {[10 0 0][10 0 1]}.
You can instead use the Vector Select menu that appears, to
Revolve Parameters cursor define the rotation vector in the Axis databox.
Total Angle
90.0 Specify in Total Angle, the total positive or negative rotation
angle, in degrees, using “right-hand” rule.
Offset Angle
Specify in Offset Angle, an optional offset angle in degrees.
0.0 (Default is no offset.)
<Type> per <Type> If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify in <Type> per
<Type>, the number of curves, surfaces or solids to create
1 within the specified Total Angle. Otherwise if PATRAN 2
Convention is OFF, <Type> per <Type> is disabled.
Auto Execute
Specify the points, curves or surfaces either by cursor selecting
<Type> List them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point
5 10, Curve 10, Surface 1:10.
The Select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.
-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Functions is ON which means you do not need Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
to press the Apply button to execute the form. • Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve Revolve Method Example


Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from
Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Revolve

Curve ID List
5
12 13

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Axis
Y
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Z X
Revolve Parameters
Total Angle
180.0
Offset Angle After:
30.0
Curves per Point
1 6

Auto Execute
Point List 5 16

Point 12 13
14

-Apply-
12 13

Y 15

Z X
17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Revolve Method Example


Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the
Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1
[x1 y1 1]}.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Revolve

Surface ID List
1

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0 1 2

Axis
Y
{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}

Z X
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
45.0
Offset Angle
After:
0.0
Surfaces per Curve
1

Auto Execute 3
Curve List
Construct 2 Point Curve

1
-Apply-
1 2

Z X

Curve Select Menu Icon


CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Revolve Method Example


Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the
surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Revolve 21

Surface ID List 12
2 20
11
19
Refer. Coordinate Frame 10
17 9 18
Coord 0

Axis
{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}
Y

Sweep Parameters Z X
Total Angle
360.0
After:
Offset Angle
0.0
21
Surfaces per Curve
12
1 20
11
Auto Execute 19
10
Curve List 18
17 9
Curve 9:12

-Apply-

Y 2 3
X 4
5
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Revolve Method


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The
axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation
of 90 degrees.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid 13 14
Method: Revolve

Solid ID List
1
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0

Axis Y
12 15
Construct2PointAxis
Z X

Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
90.0
Offset Angle After:
0.0
Solids per Surface 14
1
13
Auto Execute
Surface List
2
Surface 2
1

16
-Apply-
Y 15
17
X
Z 12

Axis Select Menu Icon


CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Solid Revolve Method


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1
about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Solid
3
Method: Revolve
1
Solid ID List 1

1 4

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Axis
Coord 1.1 Y
Y

1 X
Sweep Parameters X Z
Total Angle Z

90.0
Offset Angle After:
0.0
2
Solids per Surface
3
1
1
1
Auto Execute
4
Surface List
Surface 1 1

-Apply- Y

1 X
Z
Y 5
6 8
X
Z 7

Axis Select Menu Icon

1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method)


Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option
The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a
defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a
specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
1 Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve Length
◆ Input Length

◆ Calculate Length
If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in
0.0
model units. See Creating Orthogonal Curves with the
Calculate Length Option (p. 218) for information on the
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay Calculate Length button.

◆ Deltaic ◆ Deltaz

Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Enter in Construction Plane List, either the coordinate values of a
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} vector that is normal to the 2D plane that the new curve will lie in
(example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}); or cursor define the vector using the
Vector Select menu.
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List

Curve List

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Construction Plane List


{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Flip Curve Direction If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new
curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and
Auto Execute the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction
Point List is defined by the curve’s connectivity.

Curve List Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point
location the curve will be created from.
Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will
be perpendicular to. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or
-Apply- use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to
cursor define the locations.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference


Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option


Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the
plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and
its starting point is near Point 3.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2

Object: Curve 3

Method: 2D Normal
Z
Curve ID List
1 X Y
Curve Length
1
◆ Input Length

◆ Calculate Length
1.0
Y
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
1
◆ Deltax ◆ Deltaz
◆ ◆ Z X
4
Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane
After:
Construction Plane List
Cord 3.3

2
Flip Curve Direction
3
Auto Execute
Z
Point List
6
Point 3 1
5 X Y
Curve List 1
Surface 1.4

-Apply-
Y 1
4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option


This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2

Object: Curve 3

Method: 2D Normal
Z
Curve ID List
1 X Y
Curve Length
1
◆ Input Length

◆ Calculate Length
0.0
Y
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
1
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz Z X
4
Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane
After:
Construction Plane List
Cord 3.3 2

3
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute Z
Point List
Point 3 5 X Y
1
6
Curve List
1
Surface 1.4

-Apply-
Y

1
Z X
4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option


The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a
defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from
specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
4 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve Length

◆ Input Length
◆ Calculate Length If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called
Length Calculation Points will appear (shown below). You must
0.0 enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes shown
below that the curve will be created between.
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz Press Calculate Curve Length first to update the curve length
displayed in the databox above, before you complete the
Calculate Curve Length remainder of the form (if Auto Execute is ON), or before you
press the Apply button.
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3
Length Calculation Points
Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute
Auto Execute Point 1
Point List

Curve List Point 2

-Apply- Length Calculation Points Subordinate Form


CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are
projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and
the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle
simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven
by the input point(s).

◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz
The default construction plane now comes from the
Calculate Curve Length global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the
default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the
Project to Plane
databox value to the default coordinate
Construction Plane List frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default
Coord 0.3

Flip Curve Direction If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the
new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve
Auto Execute
length and the normal direction of the construction plane.
Point List The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity.

Curve List Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point
location the curve will be created from.
Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will
be perpendicular to.
-Apply- Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point
Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the
locations.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Example


Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the
plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a
point that is closest to Point 6.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Normal
1
Curve ID List 1
1

Curve Length

◆ Input Length 2
◆ Calculate Length 5

0.0

◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay Y
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz 6
Z X
Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List After:
Coord 0.1
8

Flip Curve Direction


Auto Execute 1
Point List
1
Point 6
1
Curve List
Surface 1.3 2
5

-Apply-
7
Y
6
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Calculate Length Option Example


Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance
between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts
from a point that is closest to Point 3.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
3
Method: 2D Normal
Curve ID List Z
1
X3 Y
Curve Length

◆ Input Length 1
◆ Calculate Length

1.41421

Y
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz
X
1
Z
Calculate Curve Length 4

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List After:
Cord 3.3

Flip Curve Direction


Auto Execute 2
Point List 3
Z
Point 3 6
1
Curve List
5 X3 Y
1
Surface 1.4

-Apply- 1
Y 4

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating 2D Circle Curves


The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D
plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other
point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Circle

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curves per Circle
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of
4 parametric cubic curves to compose the circle.
Circle Radius
◆ Input Radius
If Input Radius is ON, enter the value of the circle’s radius in

◆ Calculate Radius model units.
If Calculate Radius is ON, specify the point location in
Radius Point List that the radius will be measured to, from the
specified center point. Either enter the ID from the keyboard
(example: Point 10, Surface 3.1.1, Node 30); or cursor select
Project to Plane the point, vertex, node or other point location using the Point
Select menu.
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3

Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if
unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default
coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Default

Circle Radius
◆ Input Radius

◆ Calculate Radius

Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point,
and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the
Construction Plane List plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the
Coord 0.3 center point, and the projection is done with respect to that
new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,
Auto Execute or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

Center Point List


[0 0 0] Specify the point location that defines the center of the
circle, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20); or by cursor
selecting the location. The Point Select menu can be used
-Apply- to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
point location.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the


MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions is ON which means you do
not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form. ☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve 2D Circle Method With the Input Radius Option Example


Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the
circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal
is the Z axis of Coord 0.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Circle
1
Curve ID List
5

Curves per Circle


4

Circle Radius
Y
◆ Input Radius

◆ Calculate Radius Z X

1.0

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
After:
Cord 0.3

Auto Execute
Center Point List
12
Node 1

-Apply- 1

5
Y

Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve 2D Circle Method With the Calculate Radius Option Example


Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is
measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose
normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Circle
Curve ID List
5
1 12
Curves per Circle
4

Circle Radius

◆ Input Radius
Y
◆ Calculate Radius
Z X

Radius Point List


Point 12
After:
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Cord 0.3

Auto Execute
Center Point List
5 1 12
Node 1

-Apply-
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves


The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter
inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be
input.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D ArcAngles
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Curve ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curves per Arc


1

Arc Parameters
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
Radius of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.
1.0

Start Angle
0.0 Enter the Arc parameters defined as Radius, Start Angle
and End Angle (degrees).
End Angle
360.0

Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point,
and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the
Construction Plane List plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input
point, and the projection is done with respect to that new
Coord 0.3 plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,
or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Arc Parameters
Radius
1.0

Start Angle
0.0

End Angle
360.0

Project to Plane The default construction plane now comes from the
global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the
Construction Plane List default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select
menus also have a new entry to restore the databox
Coord 0.3 value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane,
whichever is appropriate.
Auto Execute Default
Center Point List
[0 0 0] Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations for the arc’s center point, by entering the IDs
from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,
-Apply- Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point
locations using the Point Select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the


MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to execute the form.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve 2D ArcAngle Method Example


Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D ArcAngles
Curve ID List
1

Curves per Arc


1

Arc Parameters Y
Radius
1.0 X
Z
Start Angle
0.0

End Angle
160.0 After:

Project to Plane
1
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3

2
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]

Y
-Apply-
Z X 1
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method)


Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option
The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are
provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting
and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s
starting and ending points.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Method: 2D Arc2Point created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1

Option: Center
Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.
Arc2Point Parameters... (Center parameters are displayed.)

If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will


appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p.
?) for more information.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are
projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point,
and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This
toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that
plane, driven by the input point(s).

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List The default construction plane now comes from the global
Coord 0.3 preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord
0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new
entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Default

Starting Point List


Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for
the arc’s center and arc’s starting and ending points, by entering
Ending Point List the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,
Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations
using the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Min. Angle Option Example


Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen;
the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies
within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
1
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Curve ID List
5

Option: Center

Arc2Point Parameters... 12 13

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List Y

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}


Z X

Auto Execute
Center Point List After:
Point 12
5
Starting Point List
114
Point 13

Ending Point List


Node 1

-Apply-
12 13

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Max. Angle Option Example


Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen;
the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies
within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
1
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Curve ID List
5

Option: Center

12 13
Arc2Point Parameters...

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Y
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Z X

Auto Execut e
Center Point List After:
Point 12
114
Starting Point List
Point 13

Ending Point List


Node 1

12 13

-Apply-

Z X
5
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option


The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are
provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting
and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s
starting and ending points.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.


Option: Radius (Center parameters are displayed.)

Arc2Point Parameters...

Project to Plane
If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will
Construction Plane List appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 236) for more information.
Coord 0.3

Arc Radius
1.0

Create Center Point


Flip Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List

Ending Point List

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected
directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the
projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the
input point(s).

Project to Plane
The default construction plane now comes from the global
Construction Plane List preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord
Coord 0.3 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new
entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Arc Radius
1.0
Default
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
If Create Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be created.
Auto Execute
If Flip Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be flipped to
Starting Point List create arc.

Ending Point List


Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the
arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node
-Apply- 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method with Radius Option Example


Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end
points and in the Z construction plane.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method:2D Arc2Point

Curve ID List
1

Option: Radius

Arc2Point Parameters...
Y
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Z X
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Arc Radius
1.5
After:
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
Auto Execute 2
Starting Point List
[-1 -.5 -1]

Ending Point List


[1 1 1]

1
-Apply- 1
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form


The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is
pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form.

Arc2Point Parameters Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on


Curves per Arc the Create/Curve/2D Arc2Point form. If PATRAN 2
Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric
1 cubic curves to create per Arc.

Arc Angle:Minimum Angle

If Minimum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc


based on the smallest angle possible between the specified
OK Cancel
starting and ending points.
If Maximum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc
based on the largest angle possible between the specified
starting and ending points.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method)


The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point
locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: 2D Arc3Point Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List
1

Curves per Arc Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
1 of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

Project to Plane

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus
the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise,
the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection
is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane.
This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane
specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if
unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default
coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Default

Project to Plane
Construction Plane List
Coord 0.3

Create Center Point


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Starting Point List

Middle Point List


Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the
arc’s starting, middle and ending points, by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1,
Ending Point List Node 20); or cursor defining the point locations using the Point
Select menu.

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
calculated center of the arc. • Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Curve 2D Arc3Point Method Example


Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the
Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that
Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Curve 14
Object:
Method: 2D Arc3Point 1

Curve ID List
5

Curves per Arc


1

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List


{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Y
13

Z X
Create Center Point

Auto Execute
Starting Point List After:
Point 13
145
Middle Point List
Point 14 1
15

Ending Point List


Node 1

-Apply-

Y 16 13
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Surfaces from Curves


Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves
The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges.
Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle)
(p. 41) for more information.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Surface ID List
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: 2 Curve
Parameterization Method

◆ Chord Length Deactivated and not used for the 2 Curve option.

◆ Uniform
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or
Manifold face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor
Manifold Surface selecting it with the Surface Select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Starting Curve List the form.

Ending Curve List

-Apply- ☞ More Help:


• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Specify in Starting and Ending Curve Lists, the curves


or edges for the new surfaces, either by entering the
IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface
10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve
locations using the Curve Select menu.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves
5 and 6.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve
17
Surface ID List
2
6
12
Option: 2 Curve 5

Parameterization Method 18


◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Y 16
Manifold
X
Manifold Surface Z

After:
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Curve 5
17
Ending Curve List
Curve 6
12 6
2
5
-Apply-
18

Y 16

X
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example


Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface
1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 2 3

Surface ID List
2
1
Option: 2 Curve 5

Parameterization Method

◆ Chord Length 1 4

◆ Uniform Y

Manifold Z X

Manifold Surface

Auto Execute After:


Starting Curve List
Surface 1.3

Ending Curve List 2 3


Construct 2 Point Curve

1
-Apply- 2
5

1 4

Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method)


The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing
curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Surface
Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
Method: be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
1
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points on the surface is based on the chord length distances
Option: 3 Curve
relative to the location of the surface’s middle curve. This
Parameterization Method means the surface may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the middle curve is

◆ Chord Length located.
◆ Uniform If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on
the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the
middle curve is located. That is, the surface will be always
Auto Execute uniformly parameterized.
Starting Curve List
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Middle Curve List
the form.

Ending Curve List Specify in the Starting, Middle and Ending Curve Lists, the
curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining
the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.
-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves
5, 6 and 8.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create
Object: Surface
Curve 19
Method: 8
21
Surface ID List
2 17
5 6
12
Option: 3 Curve 18

Parameterization Method 16

◆ Chord Length Y
◆ Uniform
X
Z
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Curve 5

Middle Curve List After:


Curve 6

Ending Curve List


19
Curve 8 8
21

17
-Apply- 5 6
2
12
18

16

X
Z
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example


Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1.

Before:
Geometry

Action: Create
10
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 3

Surface ID List 11
8
2

2
Option: 3 Curve
1
Parameterization Method 9

◆ Chord Length 6
1
◆ Uniform 1
Y 5

Auto Execute Z X
7
Starting Curve List
Surface 1.4

Middle Curve List


After:
Curve 2

Ending Curve List 10

Curve 3
3

-Apply- 8 11

2
1
9
6 1
1
5
Y

7
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method)


The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing
curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Surface ID List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
Option: 4 Curve that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves.
Parameterization Method This means the surface may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are

◆ Chord Length located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
◆ Uniform points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of
where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be
always uniformly parameterized.
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Second Curve List

Third Curve List


Specify in the Starting, Second, Third and Ending Curve Lists,
the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,
Ending Curve List either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve
10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve
locations using the Curve Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Curve Method With 4 Curve Option Example


Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves
5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 24

Surface ID List 22 2 2
3
23
Option: 4 Curve 19
8
Parameterization Method 21
17

◆ Chord Length
6
◆ Uniform 12 5
18
Y
Auto Execute 16
Starting Curve List X
Z
Curve 5

Second Curve List


After:
Curve 6

Third Curve List


Curve 8
24
Ending Curve List
22 2
Surface 2.4 2

23
-Apply- 19
8
21
17 3

12 6
5
18
Y
16
X
Z

Curve Select Menu Icon


PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method)


The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of
curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Curve Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
1
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points that describe the surface is based on the chord length
Option: N-Curves distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and
third curves. This means the surface may or may not be
Parameterization Method
uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior

◆ Chord Length curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric
coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly
◆ Uniform spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located.
That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized.
Curve List
Specify in Curve List, two or more curves or edges that the
surface will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.2 11.1, Solid
10.1.1 12.1.1), or cursor select the curves or edges using the
Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.
-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Curve Method With N-Curves Option Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through
Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 24
22
9 10
Surface ID List 19
8 23 25
2 21
17
Option: N-Curves 12 6
5
18
Parameterization Method
16

◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform Y

Curve List X
Z
Curve 5 6 8:10

After:
-Apply-

22 24
9 10
19
8
2 23 25
21
17
12 6
5
18

16

X
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Composite Surfaces


Figure 4-1 The Composite method creates surfaces that are composed from multiple
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

surfaces.
When toggled ON, uses all the boundary vertices from the Surface List. When toggled OFF, will enable
vertex selection. If the Vertex List is left empty the original surface edges will be automatically merged
until a slope change is encountered in the boundary. The slope change criteria is specified by the "Node-
Edge Snap Angle" in the Finite Elements form under Preferences in the main menu. If vertices are
specified, they will be graphically marked. This option is probably the most powerful as it will allow the
mesher to ignore unimportant details on the boundary.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface

Method:Composite
Allows the user to define larger surface regions within a model,
Surface ID List typically when existing surfaces are too detailed for mesh
2 creation. Composite surfaces may be meshed using a larger
element edge length than supported on the more detailed,
Delete Constituent Surfaces underlying surfaces. A composite surface is initially defined by
selecting the existing surfaces to be combined. The surfaces
Surface List will be graphically highlighted when picked or when the mouse
focus is put on the surface list by picking in the listbox.

Defines where geometric vertices, and subsequently finite


Use All Edge Vertices element nodes are to be placed on the Composite Surface
boundary.
Vertex List
There are three Inner Loop Options:
All will use all closed loops to identify the interior boundary of the
composite surface.
Vertex
Options... List None will create a surface with no internal holes.

Inner Loop Option: All Select will enable the user to identify existing interior holes to be
part of the new surface. If the inner loop is defined by more than
one edge, selection of any one of those will be enough. To add a
hole which is not part of a surface, the Preview Boundary option
Preview Boundary must be used. In this case all curves have to be selected to
identify the inner loop.
-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
Highlights the current outer and inner
• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
boundary free edges and enables the
Modify Boundary Frame. • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Appears either when the Preview Boundary option is selected or if the Composite Surface
Builder was not able to identify a clean boundary from the Surface List. The free edges will be
highlighted and marked as follows:
White: Free edges within the Surface List.
Dark Blue: Free edges shared by one other surface not in the Surface List.
Cyan: Free edges shared by more than one surface not in the Surface List.
Red: Free edges that have not been processed due to either a gap or a multiple branch path in
the Surface List.

Vertex
Options... List
Modify Boundary:
Add/Remove toggles allow edges or curves to be added

◆ Add ◆ Remove or removed from the Surface List boundary. Add places
selected curves and edges in the Edge List databox and
also supports curve creation on-the-fly. Remove operates
Edge List
in Autoexecute mode whereby previously highlighted
Surface 1.3 curves or edges are simply unhighlighted.

Reset can be used to start over again. If Surface List


Reset contains a previous used surface and the boundary has
been modified, the previous modification list can be used
again.
-Apply- Apply will initiate the Composite Surface Builder to use
the Edge List in conjunction with the Surface List to build
a new surface. If the proposed boundary is incorrect, the
problem location will be marked and a message will
appear.
General Comments
If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the
location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”.
The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this
is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new
surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is
more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission
to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be
represented by multiple composite surfaces.
If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and clean-up
tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default
gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the
Options form.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Composite Surface Options

Used to create the boundary loops. This value has to be increased to


automatically close existing gaps larger than the tolerance value.

Cleanup Tol. 0.005 Only used in the Surface Builder to ignore gaps
between surface edges.
Gap Distance 0.005
Will zoom on the model location where the builder has
detected a boundary gap or branch. This is useful for
Auto Zoom In Problem large Composite Surfaces.

Detailed Information Display


Controls the appearance of warning messages when
gaps or branches are encountered. For the experienced
Auto Select Outer Boundary
user, they may rather not see the warning messages but
simply rely on graphical feedback as previously
Erase Original Surfaces described.

Ok Defaults

Erases (not deletes) the original surfaces upon successful construction of a


Composite Surface. This is identical to using the Plot/Erase functionality
under Display.

If toggled OFF, the user will be prompted to identify the outer


boundary via a query process. This is needed if the default method of
Auto Select fails.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Composite Method Example


Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Composite

Z
Surface ID List
2 1 Y
X
Delete Constituent Surfaces

Surface List
Surface 1T#

Z
X Y
Use All Edge Vertices

Vertex List
After:

Options...
Vertex List
Inner Loop Option: All
Z

1 Y
X
Preview Boundary

-Apply-

Z Y

X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces


The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by
choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided
trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric
solid.
See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 37) for more information on how to use the
Decompose method.

Geometry
Action: Create

Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Decompose Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List
1

Surface Enter the trimmed surface to decompose either by


entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Surface 10);
or by cursor selecting the surface.

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Surface Vertex 1 List means you do not need to chose the Apply button to
execute the form.

Surface Vertex 2 List Enter in the Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four
vertices that will define the new surface. Use the Vertex
Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select
the vertices.
Surface Vertex 3 List

Surface Vertex 4 List


☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
-Apply-
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Decompose Method Example


Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from
Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface
Vertex databoxes on the form.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 17 15

Object: Surface

Method: Decompose
14
Surface ID List
3
2

Surface
12
Surface 2
Y

Auto Execute Z X

Surface Vertex 1 List 18 16


Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 1.0000

Surface Vertex 2 List After:


Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 0.0000 17 15
Surface Vertex 3 List
Surface 2(u 0.516341)(v 0.0000 3

Surface Vertex 4 List


14
Surface 2(u 0.331216)(v 1.0000
19
4 2
-Apply-
20
12

Y
5
Z X

18 16
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method)


The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four
intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Method: Edge created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
1 Set this option to either 3 Edge or 4 Edge. The 3 Edge option
will create a degenerate three sided surface.
Option: 4 Edge
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for
Manifold the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with
the Surface Select menu.
Manifold Surface

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference


Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
Enter in the Surface Edge 1,2, 3 and/or 4 Lists, the three or four
curves or edges that will bound the new surface, either by
Surface Edge 2 List entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface
10.2, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor selecting them with the Curve
Select menu that appears on the bottom.

Surface Edge 3 List

Surface Edge 4 List


☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
-Apply- • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Edge Method With the 3 Edge Option Example


Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from
Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41).

Geometry Before:
Action: Create

Object: Surface 13 14

Method: 5
Edge
16 2
Surface ID List
6
3
12 15
Option: 3 Edge

Manifold
Y

Manifold Surface
Z X

Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
After:
Curve 5

Surface Edge 2 List


Curve 6 13 14

5
Surface Edge 3 List
16 3 2
Surface 2.1
6

-Apply- 12 15

Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Edge Method With the 4 Edge Option Example


Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5
through 8.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Edge 18 6
7
12 5
Surface ID List
2

Option: 4 Edge 19
8
Manifold 17
Y
Manifold Surface
Z X

Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
After:
Curve 5

Surface Edge 2 List


Curve 6

Surface Edge 3 List 18 6


7 2
Curve 7 12 5
Surface Edge 4 List
Curve 8

19
8
-Apply- 17
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Extracting Surfaces
Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option
The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant
parametric ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) , or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2
has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . One surface is extracted from each
solid.

Geometry
Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Extract

Surface ID List
1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Option: Parametric
Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane

◆ Constant v Plane Select either Constant u Direction, Constant v Direction, or
Constant w Direction. The surfaces will either be created

◆ Constant w Plane either along the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction;
along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction; or along
Surface Position the ξ 3 (w) direction for Constant w Direction.

0.0 1.0
0.5

u Parametric Value Specify the solid’s ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ), or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate


value for the location of the surface, either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of
Auto Execute ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the connectivity of the solid.
Solid List You can plot the parametric directions by choosing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane

◆ Constant v Plane

◆ Constant w Plane

Surface Position
0.0 1.0
0.5

u Parametric Value
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
Solid List execute the form.

Specify in Solid List, the solids that you want to extract


-Apply- surfaces from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(example: Solid 1:10), or cursor select the solids using
the Solid Select menu that appears on the bottom.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at
ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
20
Object: Surface 2
19 1 21
Method: Extract 3 22

Surface ID List
2 1

Option: Parametric
Surface Plane
17

◆ Constant u Plane Y

◆ Constant v Plane 12 18
Z X
◆ Constant w Plane 16

Surface Position
0.0 1.0
0.75 After:
w Parametric Value 20
2 21
Auto Execute 19 1

Solid List 3 22
Solid 1

1
-Apply-
26
2 2
1 25
23
17
Y 24
12 18
Z X
16
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example


Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at
ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu
icons listed below.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 10

Object: Surface
2 9
Method: Extract 7

Surface ID List 8
3

Option: Parametric 5

Surface Plane

◆ Constant u Plane 1 Y 6
1

◆ Constant v Plane
◆ Constant w Plane Z X
4
Surface Position
0.0 1.0
0.75 After:
w Parametric Value 10

Auto Execute
2 9
Solid List 7

Construct 2SurfaceSolid (Eva


8
14
-Apply-
5
11 3 13

1 Y 1 6
12

Solid Select Menu Icons Z X


4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option


The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is
extracted from each solid face.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Surface ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: Face

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Face List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in Face List, the solid faces to create surfaces on, either by
-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 10.2 11.1); or
by cursor selecting the faces.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Extract Method With the Face Option Example


Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two
faces of Solid 10.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
20
Object: Surface 2
1 21
19
Method: Extract 3 22

Surface ID List
2 1

Option: Face
Auto Execute
17
Face List Y
12 18
Solid 1.1 1.2 Z X
16

-Apply-

After:
1
20
12 2 21
19 1
23 22

3
1
2

17
Y
12 18
Z X
16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Fillet Surfaces


The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid
faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the
surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be
created.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Fillet Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Surface ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Fillet Radius 1 is the fillet radius. This is either a constant fillet
Fillet Parameters radius (if Fillet Radius 2 is left blank) or part of a varying radius.
Fillet Radius 1 Only one radius value is allowed for all pairs of surfaces or faces
specified in Surface/Point 1 and 2 List.
Fillet Radius 2 is optional. If a value is entered, MSC.Patran will
Fillet Radius 2 create a fillet with a varying radius, with the first edge beginning
at Radius 1 and gradually varying to Radius 2 at the opposite
edge.
Fillet Tolerance Fillet Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the fillet when
MSC.Patran subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet
0.005
position. Decreasing the tolerance helps when the fillet is very
small compared to the geometry model. Default is .005.
Trim Original Surfaces

Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List

Points 1 and 2 Surface 2


Surface/Point 2 List
Radius 1
Fillet Patch

-Apply- Area To Be
Surface 1 Trimmed

Radius 2
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Fillet Radius 1

Fillet Radius 2
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original surfaces specified in
the Surface/Point 1 and 2 listboxes. Each surface is trimmed
Fillet Tolerance from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original
0.005 surface.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Trim Original Surfaces Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
Auto Execute execute the form.
Surface/Point 1 List
Specify in Surface/Point 1 List and Surface/Point 2 List,
the existing pair of surfaces or faces, along with their
corner points that the fillet will be created between. For
Surface/Point 2 List each listbox, the Surface Select menu and the Point Select
menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define
the appropriate surfaces or faces, and the points, vertices,
nodes, or other appropriate corner point locations provided
on the Point Select menu.
-Apply-

Points 1 and 2 Surface 2

Radius 1
Fillet Patch

Area To Be
Surface 1 Trimmed

Radius 2

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Fillet Method Example


Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s
endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface 2
Method: Fillet

Surface ID List 3
4 1

Fillet Parameters 1
Fillet Radius 1 10
0.25 3
4
Fillet Radius 2 Y

0.5 X
Z
9
Fillet Tolerance
0.005

Trim Original Surfaces After:


Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List 15
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

Surface/Point 2 List
1
1
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
14

-Apply- 11 1
10 4

3
Y
12
Z X
9
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Fillet Method Example


Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s
endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 24

Object: Surface
Method: Fillet
4
20 25
Surface ID List
5

Fillet Parameters 16

Fillet Radius 1 18 23
0.75 5
Y 3
Fillet Radius 2 6
17
Z X
Fillet Tolerance 19
0.005

After:
Trim Original Surfaces
30
Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
28 4
Surface/Point 2 List
31
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

-Apply- 27 5 29
18

Y 3
6
Z X 26
19
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Matching Adjacent Surfaces


The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched
edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive
common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric
orientations. MSC.Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and
Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and
Meshing (p. 12) for more information.
You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See
Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) for more information.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Match

Surface ID List
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface 1
1
and 2 List from the database.

Delete Original Surfaces By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Surface 1 List
Specify in Surface 1 List, the surface or face to which the new
surface will be matched. Specify in Surface 2 List, the surface or
Surface 2 List face to match with Surface 1. Either enter the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them
using the Surface Select menu.

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Topology (p. 10)
• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or
Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Match Method Example


Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface
2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Match 13 14 18

Surface ID List
4 2 3

Delete Original Surfaces

Auto Execute 12 15 17
Y
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 Z X

Surface 2 List
Surface 3

-Apply- After:

13 14 18

2 4

12 15 17
Y

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Constant Offset Surface


This form is used to create a constant offset surface.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Method: Offset created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
1 Specify the constant offset value of the surface.

Offset Parameters Specify the number of copies of the offset surface to create
using the Repeat Count parameter.
Constant Offset Value
1.0

Repeat Count By default, Do not use a guiding surface is set to use the
surface normal or the direction vector, if reversed from the
1
surface normal for the offset direction. If this toggle is
changed to Use first surface as guiding surface, then the
offset direction for all surfaces to be created will the same as
Do not use a the first surface in the Surface List.
guiding surface By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Surface List the form.
Specify the surface used to create an offset surface from
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 10 11. The Surface select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
Draw Direction Vector
cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
Reverse Direction
Draws the direction vector of the surface to create the offset
Reset Graphics
surface from.

-Apply- Reverses the direction vector of the surface to create the


offset surface from.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Constant Offset Surface Example


Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and
reversing the direction vector of surface 1.

Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Offset

Surface ID List
2 1

Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
0.5

Repeat Count
2

Y
Do not use a X Z
guiding surface
Auto Execute
After:
Surface List
Surface 1

Draw Direction Vector

Reverse Direction 3

Reset Graphics 2
1
-Apply-

Y
X Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Ruled Surfaces


The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Ruled
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Surface Parameterization

◆ Equal Arc Length
◆ Equal Parametric Values
If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will define the ruled
surface’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 parametric directions based on the arc
length parameterizations of the ξ 1 direction for the curves or
edges in Curve 1 List, and the ξ 2 direction for the curves or
Avoid Bow Tie Surface edges in Curve 2 List. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, the
curves or edges in Curve 1 List define the surface’s ξ 1 direction
Auto Execute and the curves or edges in Curve 2 List define the surface’s ξ 2
direction. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the curve and
Ruling Curve 1 List surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by
choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
Ruling Curve 2 List

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference


Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

If Avoid Bow Tie Surface is ON, MSC.Patran will optimize


the ruled surface, so that the two curves ξ 1 directions do not
need to be aligned or be in the same direction. The resulting
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
ruled surface will not be twisted or bow tied. This is the
Auto Execute default setting. If Allow Bow Tie Surface is ON, if the ξ 1
direction of the curves or edges in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List
Ruling Curve 1 List are not aligned, a bow tie ruled surface will be created.

Ruling Curve 2 List

Specify in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List, the two curves or edges


to create the ruled surface between. Either enter the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1); or cursor
-Apply-
select them using the Curve Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Ruled Method Example


Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
6
Object: Surface
2
Method: Ruled
5
Surface ID List
1

Surface Parameterization

◆ Equal Arc Length
◆ Equal Parametric Values
1 Y

Z X 1
4
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List
After:
Curve 1
6
Ruling Curve 2 List
Curve 2 2

5
-Apply-

1 Y

Z X 1
4
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Ruled Method Example


Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge
of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric
Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric ξ 1 direction is the same as for Curve 5.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 18

Object: Surface
Method: Ruled 19

Surface ID List
2
3
2

Surface Parameterization 17 1


◆ Equal Arc Length
1
◆ Equal Parametric Values 12
Y 20
5

Z X
16
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List After:
Curve 5
18
Ruling Curve 2 List
Surface 2.4
19

-Apply-
2
2
17 1

1
21
12 3
Y 20
5

Curve Select Menu Icon Z X


16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Trimmed Surfaces


The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve
for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using
this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop
must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be
meshed by Paver.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Trimmed
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List Options for creating trimmed surfaces:


1 1. Surface: Creates a trimmed surface that has the same curvature
as a specified parent surface. The parent surface must be simply
trimmed (default color is green).
Option: Surface
2. Planar: Creates a flat or planar trimmed surface.
Auto Chain... 3. Composite: Combines surfaces into a single trimmed surface,
where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of
Use All Edge Vertices a specified length, and are not required to be topologically
congruent.
Delete Outer Loop
Use the Auto Chain feature to chain existing curves or surface
Outer Loop List edges into closed loops, defining the trim region.

If ON, MSC.Patran will determine the new trimmed surface’s


edge and vertex locations directly from the loop or chained
Delete Inner Loops curve’s definition. That is, the edges and vertices are defined
by the links in the chained curve. If OFF, MSC.Patran will
Inner Loop List determine the edge and vertex locations of the new trimmed
surface by the slope discontinuities in the chain.

Delete Constituent Surface

Surface List

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Specify in Outer Loop List, one chained curve to represent the outer boundary of the
trimmed surface either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Curve 10), or by
cursor selecting the curve.

Delete Outer Loop If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curves specified in
the Outer Loop List listbox.
Outer Loop List

Delete Inner Loops If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curve specified in
Inner Loop List.
Inner Loop List
Specify in Inner Loop List, one or more optional chained curves
to represent holes or cutouts in the trimmed surface, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Curve 10 12), or
Delete Constituent Surface by cursor selecting the curves.

Surface List
Specify in Surface List, the surfaces that will be the parent
surface whose curvature will be used by the trimmed surface,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard, or by cursor
-Apply- selecting the surface. The parent surface must be simply
trimmed (default color is green).
Note: A Surface List is not required for the Planar option.

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces


specified in Surface List below from the ☞ More Help:
database.
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Creating Chained Curves (p. 131)
• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver
(p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 3: Finite Element Modeling
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option


Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from
chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the
parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are
pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: 16
Surface
Method: Trimmed
19
Surface ID List 18 20 2
3
21 22
12
Option: Surface

Auto Chain...
Use All Edge Vertices Y
X Z 17
Delete Outer Loop

Outer Loop List


Curve 22
After:
Delete Inner Loops

Inner Loop List


16
Curve 21
23

Delete Constituent Surface 24


19 25
20 30 3
Surface List 26
29
Surface 2 27 22
28
12
-Apply-
21
Y
X Z
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from
chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete
Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create 14

Object: Surface
Method: Trimmed

Surface ID List
2
13 12
Option: Planar

Auto Chain.. .
Use All Edge Vertices Y
Delete Outer Loop
Z X
16
Outer Loop List
Curve 14

After:
Delete Inner Loops
18 17
Inner Loop List
Curve 13

22
-Apply-

21 2 12

20

Z X
19 16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Auto Chain Subordinate Form


The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain
Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if
necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the
appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation.
This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the
Create/Surface/Trimmed forms.

If ON, the start point of the start curve can be switched from one end of the curve to the other.
Auto Execute must be OFF. A start curve should be selected and then toggle ON and OFF to see
a white marker designating the start point.

Auto Chain Specify the existing curve or edge to use for the start curve
of a chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the
Auto Execute IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid
Select a Start Curve 5.1.1. A Curve/Edge Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
curve or edge.

If ON, a Point select box allows to specify an end point for


the chain curve. A chain curve will be created, if it reaches
Specify End Point
the end point. If OFF, the default end point is the start point.
Switch Start Point
Pause At Every Point If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable
Current Group Only for creating a chain.

Free Edges Only


If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable
Highlight Chain Creation for creating a chain.
Delete Constituent Curves
If ON, after chain completes, the constituent curves used to
create the chain will be deleted from the database.

If ON, the created chain curve will be highlighted. Either changing the value to OFF or
picking another start curve will erase the highlight.

If ON, the OK button must be selected for each constituent curve that is
identified as the next curve in the chain. If OFF, it will automatically continue
as.far as possible before user-intervention is necessary.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Choose Curve to Continue Identifies the curve which is chosen to continue


the chain.

Next OK

Previous Quit

Backup Stop

Delete Break

-Apply- Cancel

Next: Used to update the "Choose Curve OK: Used to finalize the selection on the curve
to Continue" databox when multiple echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue"
choices are possible, i.e. a branch. databox and continue the auto chain
process.

Previous: Used to update "Choose Curve to Quit: Used to end the auto chain process without
Continue" databox when more than attempting to creating a chain.
two curves form a branch. Use in
conjunction with the Next button.

Backup: Used to backup one curve at a time Stop: Used to end the auto chain process and
in the list of curves that have been attempt to create a chain from the
previously selected as constituents constituent curves. (Only necessary when
for the resulting chain. pressing the Apply button did not create a
chain.)

Delete: Used to delete the curve in the Break: Used to break the curve in the "Choose
"Choose Curve to Continue" Curve to Continue" databox.
databox from the database.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option


The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a
single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a
specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent
surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface
is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver.

Shadow Surface Method. The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a
Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy.
Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind
the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same
is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The
shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of
the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view.
The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps
of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer
and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges.
During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which
constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the
parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface.

Creating Composite Surfaces. The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part,
the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions:
• More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces).
• A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps
or overlaps.
• An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following:
• Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not occur.
In other words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the
current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a
one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that
combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite
surface.
• No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface
does not have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an
area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion
has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be
represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted
holes or spikes in the geometry.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Shadow
Plane

Not Acceptable
S2

S1

Acceptable

S2
S1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Trimmed Method - Composite Option Example


Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from
chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the
parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are
pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2 3 5
Object: Surface 10 4 11
Method: Trimmed
12 13
2
1
Surface ID List
5
7 8
3
Option:Composite 1 4 6
Auto Chain... Y
Gap Distance
Z X
0.005

Use All Edge Vertices


Delete Outer Loop

Outer Loop List


Curve 5
After:

Delete Inner Loops 2 3 5


10 11
Inner Loop List 12 13
Curve 4
5
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List 8
Surface 1:4 1 4 6

-Apply- Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method)


The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the
surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Method: Vertex created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
If ON, MSC.Patran will allow you to specify a surface or solid
1 face in the Manifold Surface databox to manifold the new surface
onto.
Manifold
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face
Manifold Surface for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it
with the Surface Select menu.

Auto Execute
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Surface Vertex 1 List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Surface Vertex 2 List


Specify in Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 Lists, the four points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations that define the surface’s
Surface Vertex 3 List vertices or corners. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.1.1); or
cursor select them using the Point Select menu.
Surface Vertex 4 List

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Vertex Method Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and
Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: 1 14
Surface
Method: Vertex

Surface ID List
2

Manifold

Manifold Surface

Auto Execute Y
12 13
Surface Vertex 1 List Z X
Point 12

Surface Vertex 2 List


After:
Point 13

Surface Vertex 3 List


15 14
Point 14

Surface Vertex 4 List


Node 1

-Apply- 2

Y
12 13
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Extruding Surfaces and Solids


The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid
face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating
simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more
complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Surface or Solid.

Method: Extrude

<Type> ID List
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to
1 be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0

Origin of Scale and Rotate


[0 0 0]
Refer. Coordinate Frame is used by the Origin of Scale and
Translation Vector Rotate databox and the Translation Vector databox to express
the coordinates of the origin and vector within a specific
<1 0 0> coordinate frame. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord
0. Enter in Origin of Scale and Rotate, the point location of the
Sweep Parameters origin of scaling and rotation. Either enter the coordinate values
(example: [10 0 0]); or use the Point Select menu to cursor
Scale Factor define alternate point locations. Enter in Translation Vector, a
1.0 vector definition defining the direction and distance that the curve
or surface is moved through space. Either enter the coordinate
Angle values (example: <10 10 1>); or use the Vector Select menu to
0.0 cursor define the translation vector.
<Type> per <Type>
1

Auto Execute
<Type> List

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor Enter in Scale Factor, a scaling factor value to be applied in
1.0 the two or three directions of the surface or solid, respectively.
A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place. Enter
Angle in Angle, an optional angle value in degrees to rotate the
0.0 curve or surface about the translation vector. <Type> per
<Type> is not active or used if the PATRAN 2 Convention
<Type> per <Type> toggle is OFF. If ON, enter how many parametric bi-cubic
1 surfaces per curve or how many parametric tri-cubic solids per
curve to create.
Auto Execute
<Type> List
Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or surfaces or
solid faces that you want to extrude to create the surfaces or
solids, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
-Apply- (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1;
for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by
using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23)


in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is
ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Extrude Method Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface
is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.

Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extrude

Surface ID List
1

12
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0 5
Y
Origin of Scale and Rotate
[0 0 0] 13
X
Z
Translation Vector
<1 0 0>

Sweep Parameters After:


Scale Factor
1.0 3

Angle 4
0.0
Surface per Curve
1

Auto Execute 1
Curve List
Curve 5

-Apply- Y
1
Z X 5
2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Extrude Method Example


This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in
the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the
scale and rotation is at Point 14.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extrude

Surface ID List
1

12
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0 14
5
Origin of Scale and Rotate Y

Point 14 13
X
Translation Vector Z
<0 10 0>

Sweep Parameters After:


Scale Factor
2.0 16

Angle
90.0
Surface per Curve
1

Auto Execute 15
Curve List
2
Curve 5

-Apply-
Y 12
14
Z X
13
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Solid Extrude Method Example


Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The
solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale
is at Point 21.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
12
Object: Solid
Method: Extrude
15 13
Solid ID List 21

2
14

Refer. Coordinate Frame 1

Coord 0 17

Origin of Scale and Rotate


Point 21 18Y 20

Translation Vector
Z X
<0 10 0> 19

Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor After:
2.0
22
Angle
0.0 25 23
Solids per Curve
24
1

Auto Execute
2
Surface List
Solid 1.5

-Apply- 12
15 21 13
Y
14
1
17
Z X 18 20
19
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Gliding Surfaces
Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option
The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by
a set of director curves or edges.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option:1 Director Curve If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting
the surface. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If
Glide Input Options Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which
basically drags the director curve along the base curve surface
◆ Fixed Glide
without rotating. Three degrees-of-freedom of motion are

◆ Normal Project Glide eliminated.

Sweep Parameters Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the


director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no
Scale Factor change will occur in the size of the director curve during the
1.0 glide.

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Director Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

Base Curve List Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act
as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Curve List, one
or more base curves or edges for surfaces. Either enter the
IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10,
Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or
cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces
-Apply- using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Gliding Surfaces with
the 2 Director Curve
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Glide Method - 1 Director Curve Example


Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for
the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed
Glide is pressed in.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 16

Object: Surface
Method: Glide
10
Surface ID List
2

Option:1 Director Curve


12
Glide Input Options 11
18
13
◆ Fixed Glide 19
Y

◆ Normal Project Glide 14
Z X
Sweep Parameters 17

Scale Factor
1.0 After:
Auto Execute 16
20
Director Curve List
21
Curve 10

Base Curve List 10


2 22
Curve 11 13 14 3

4
-Apply-
12
11
18
13
Y 19

14
Z X
17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option


This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic
scaling is optional.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
2

If this toggle is ON, the base curve will automatically be scaled


Option:2 Director Curve to fit between the two director curves, If OFF, no scaling will
occur.
Scale Base Curve
Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Director Curve 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

Director Curve 2 List Director Curve 1 List and Director Curve 2 List provide a
moving local coordinate system which provides for sweeping
and scaling of the base curve. The Base Curve is swept
along the two director curves. It does not need to be attached
Base Curve List
to either director. A copy will be transformed into its
appropriate position for exclusive used by the surface.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Surface Glide Method - 2 Director Curve Example


Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve
to glide along.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide

Surface ID List
3 1 2
1 4
2
6 5
1 3
Option:2 Director Curve

Scale Base Curve


Auto Execute
Y
Director Curve 1 List Z X
Curve 1

Director Curve 2 List

Curve 2
After:
Base Curve List

Curve 3

-Apply-

3 1
6 1
5
1 2
2 4

Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method


The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of
base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the
direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness.

Geometry
Set <Type> to either Surface or Solid.
Action: Create
Object: Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid
<Type>
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Normal Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If more than one
ID is listed, the thickness of each surface or solid is based on
dividing the number of surfaces or solids into the thickness
<Type> ID List value.
1
If Constant Thickness is ON, a single thickness value is
Thickness Input Options entered in the Thickness databox below (not shown here) which

◆ Constant Thickness represents a constant offset distance for the Normal.
◆ Varying Thicknesses
If Varying Thickness is ON, you must enter two thickness values
Thickness at u=0; v=0
for surfaces and four thickness values for solids at the parametric
1.0 ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate locations shown on the form. (The
Thickness at u=0; v=1 form here shows the thickness databoxes for creating a surface.)

1.0
<Type> per <Type>
1
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Shown only for creating surfaces.


If Frenet Frame is ON, MSC.Patran uses a Frenet Frame in which the surfaces are blended together across
the contiguous edges, provided the edges have the same ξ 1 ( u ) directions. If Construction Point is ON,
enter the point location in the Construction Point databox, which defines the offset or thickness direction.
The direction is measured from the first point of the first curve given in Curve List, to the construction point
location. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Node 100, Curve 12.1); or cursor select
the point location by using the Point Select menu.

Thickness at u=0; v=0


1.0
Thickness at u=0; v=1
1.0
<Type> per <Type>
1 Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. If ON, specify the
number of parametric bi-cubic surfaces or parametric tri-cubic
Construction Point Options solids to create from each curve or surface specified in <Type>
List below.
◆ Frenet Frame

◆ Construction Point

Construction Point If ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the parametric ξ1 direction for
the base curves listed in Curve List below.

Flip <Type> Normal


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to chose the Apply button to execute the form.
<Type> List

☞ More Help:
Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or the • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
surfaces or faces that you want to create surfaces or Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
solids from, respectively. Either enter the IDs from • Topology (p. 10)
the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10,
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10,
Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve
or Surface Select menu.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface Normal Method Example


Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a
varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ 1 = 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that
the parametric direction is on.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
13
Object: Surface
Method: Normal
5
Surface ID List
2

Thickness Input Options



◆ Constant Thickness
◆ Varying Thicknesses
1
Thickness at u=0; v=0 Y
0.75
Thickness at u=0; v=1 Z X 12
2.0
Surfaces per Curve
1
After:

Construction Point Options 15


◆ Frenet Frame

◆ Construction Point

Construction Point

Flip Curve Normal


Auto Execute 2
13
Curve List
Curve 5 5
Y

-Apply- Z X 11
122 14
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Surface Normal Method Example


Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25
and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal
direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface 9

Method: Normal

Surface ID List 1
2

Thickness Input Options 1


◆ Constant Thickness 5

◆ Varying Thicknesses

Y 2
Thickness
0.25 6
Z
Surfaces per Curve X
1

Construction Point Options


After:

◆ Frenet Frame
◆ Construction Point 9

Construction Point
2
Point 9

Flip Curve Normal 10 1

Auto Execute
Curve List
5 11
Surface 1.2
1

Y 6
2
Z
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Normal Method Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a
thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface
databox is disabled.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: 5
Normal

Solid ID List
1 1 6
1
Thickness Input Options
◆ Constant Thickness

◆ Varying Thicknesses 4
Y
Thickness
0.5 Z X

Solids per Surface


1

After:
Flip Surface Normal

Auto Execute
8
Surface List
Surface 1

5
-Apply- 7 9

1
1 6
1
10

Y
4

Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Normal 5

Solid ID List
1 1
1 6
Thickness Input Options
◆ Constant Thickness

◆ Varying Thicknesses 4
Y
Thickness
Z X
-0.5

Solids per Surface


1
After:
Flip Surface Normal
5
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1 10
1 6
1

-Apply- 1

7 9
4

Y
8

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Normal Method From a Face Example


Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has
a thickness of 0.25.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
22
Object: Solid
Method: Normal 23

Solid ID List
3 2
2 20
1 1 18
Thickness Input Options
21
◆ Constant Thickness 19

◆ Varying Thicknesses

12 Y
Thickness
0.25 Z X
17
Solids per Surface
1
After:
Flip Surface Normal
24
Auto Execute
322 2
Surface List 1 25
Solid 1.6
2 23

-Apply- 27
3 2
20
26 18
11

21
19

Y
12

Z X
17
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method)


The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the
surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes
listboxes.
Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex,
then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will
define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4
appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the
outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes
listbox.
The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be
preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When
few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes
by selecting at least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the
free boundary, will be ignored.
The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to
Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the
surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pull-
down menu would create a better surface.
Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore
the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily
generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces
support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface.
To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics:
• Congruent 2-D elements
• Should be one connected set of elements
• No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes
• The outer or inner loop should not intersect.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form


Figure 4-2
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Mesh

Surface ID List
9

Delete Original Elements If toggled ON, the elements selected will be deleted when
the surface is created successfully.
Element List
Elm 1:322 364:445
Congruent element list that defines the surface.

Select four corner nodes that define the four vertices of


the resulting green surface or the parent surface of a
Outer Corner Nodes trimmed surface. If any of the boxes are left empty, one
1 Node 292 2 Node 288 will be selected automatically.

3 Node 273 4 Node 253


If there are more than four vertices for the surface, the
additional nodes can be listed in the Additional Vertex
Nodes listbox.
Additional Vertex Nodes
Node 50 34 303
By setting Inner Loop Options to All, None or Select, the
holes in the resulting surface can be defined.

Inner Loop Options: All Note: When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a
node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can
be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not
Surface Creation Methods
on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be
Fast ignored.

-Apply-

By selecting the surface creation option, emphasis can


be placed on parametrization or speed.
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Midsurfaces
Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option
This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Object: Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List
1 Specify the midsurface option:
1. Automatic
2. Manual

Max. Thickness Specify the maximum distance the solid face pairs can be apart
in order to calculate a midsurface between (wall thickness)
0.01

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Solid List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the solid(s) to create a midsurface from either by cursor


selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
-Apply- be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solid.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Create Midsurface Automatic Example


Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall
thickness is less than 8.1.

Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List
1
1

Max. Thickness
8.1

Auto Execute
Z
Solid List
Y
Solid 1 X

After:
-Apply-

5
3

1 6
4
1

Z
Y
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option


This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface
will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs.

Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Object: Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List
Specify the midsurface option:
1 1. Automatic
2. Manual

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
First Surface Set
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the first surface set of the pair to create a midsurface


Offset Surface Set from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1, Solid 1.1. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface.

-Apply- Specify the offset surface set of the pair to create a midsurface
from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 2, Solid 1.2. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Create Midsurface Manual Example


Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid
1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List
1

Auto Execute
Solid Face List
Solid 1.5 1.4 1.7
Y
Offset Solid Face List
Solid 1.9 1.8 1.10 Z X

After:
-Apply-

1 3

Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Solid Primitives


Creating a Solid Block
This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and
reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the
input target solid using the created block as the tool solid.

Geometry
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
Action: Create
1. Block
Object: Solid 2. Cylinder
Method: Primitive 3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Block Parameters Specify the length, width, and height of the block.
X Length List
1.0

Y Length List
1.0

Z Length List
1.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created block.
Modify Solid
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the block.
Boolean Operation...
Default is the global coord 0.

Refer. Coordinate Frame By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Coord 0 Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute Specify the base origin point of the block. Under The Refer.
Coordinate Frame, the created block will start at this location
Base Origin Point List extending length in x-axis, width in y-axis, and height in z-axis. If
[0 0 0] the base origin point is an [x,y,z] definition, the origin of the
block will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and
X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
1

Block Parameters
X Length List
1.0 2.0
Y
Y Length List
Z X
1.0 2.0

Z Length List
1.0 2.0 After:

Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[0 0 0] [2 0 0]

Y
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a
boolean add operation with solid 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

1
Solid ID List
2

Block Parameters
X Length List
5.0

Y Length List Y

1.0 Z X

Z Length List
1.0 After:

Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[-1 .5 .5] Boolean Operation
Geometry

-Apply- Y

X
Target Solid List Z

Solid 1

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)

OK Cancel
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Solid Cylinder


This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional
thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform
boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid.

Geometry
Action: Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
Create
1. Block
Object: Solid
2. Cylinder
Method: Primitive 3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Cylinder Parameters Specify the height, radius, and optional thickness which is used
Height List to shell the cylinder.
1.0 Default = 0.0 which designates no shelling.

Radius List
1.0

[Thickness List]
0.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created cylinder.
Modify Solid
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the
Boolean Operation...
cylinder. Default is the global coord 0.

Refer. Coordinate Frame By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Coord 0 need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute Specify the base center point and the axis of the cylinder.
If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the
Base Center Point List cylinder will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.
The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate
[0 0 0]
Frame, therefore, the cylinder axis will be defined by the absolute
value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of
Axis List Coord 0.
Coord 0.3

☞ More Help:
-Apply- • Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
1
1

Cylinder Parameters
Height List
3.0
Y
Radius List
0.25 Z X

[Thickness List]
0.0 After:

Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
Point 1

Axis List
Y
Coord 0.1
Z X

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness =
0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
8
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive 9
5
1

Solid ID List
2

Cylinder Parameters
6
Height List 3
3.0
Y 2
Radius List
Z X
0.25

[Thickness List]
0.125 After:

Modify Solid
8
Boolean Operation...
9
5
Refer. Coordinate Frame
4
Coord 0

Auto Execute
Base Center Point ListBoolean Operation
3
point 1 Geometry
2

Axis List
Y
Coord 0.1
Target Solid List Z X
Solid 1
-Apply-
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)

OK Cancel
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Solid Sphere


This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference
coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target
solid using the created sphere as the tool solid.

Geometry
Action: Create Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
Object: Solid
2. Cylinder
Method: Primitive 3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Sphere Parameters
Specify the radius of the sphere
Radius List
1.0

Modify Solid
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
Boolean Operation... selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created sphere.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the
sphere. Default is the global coord 0.
Coord 0

Auto Execute
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Center Point List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
[0 0 0]

Axis List Specify the center point and the axis of the sphere.

Coord 0.3 If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the
sphere will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate
Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, therefore, the sphere axis will be defined by
-Apply- the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the
z axis of Coord 0.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at [0 0 0] with a Radius of 1.0 along the Z axis.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
1

Sphere Parameters
Radius List
1.0
Y

Modify Solid Z X

Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


After:
Coord 0

Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]

Axis List
Coord 0.3

-Apply-

Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean
add operation with solid 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
2

Sphere Parameters
Radius List
0.5
Y

Modify Solid Z X

Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


After:
Coord 0

Auto Execute
Center Point List
Point 1

Axis List
Coord 0.2

Boolean Operation
Geometry
-Apply-

Target Solid List Z X

Solid 1

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)

OK Cancel
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Solid Cone


This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height,
optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to
perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid.

Geometry Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:


Action: Create 1. Block

Object: 2. Cylinder
Solid
3. Cone
Method: Primitive
4. Sphere
5. Torus

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be


Solid ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Cone Parameters Specify the height, top radius, bottom radius, and optional
Height List thickness. The optional thickness is used to create a hollow
cone.
1.0
Default = 0.0 which designates no hollowing.
Base Radius List
1.0

Top Radius List


0.5
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
[Thickness List] selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created cone.
0.0

Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cone.


Modify Solid Default is the global coord 0.

Boolean Operation... By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Refer. Coordinate Frame need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Coord 0
Specify the base center point and the axis of the cone.
If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of
Auto Execute the cone will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate
Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.
Base Center Point List Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cone axis will be defined by
the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is
[0 0 0] the z axis of Coord 0.

Axis List
Coord 0.3
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
-Apply-
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0,
Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
1

Cone Parameters
Height List
2.0
Y
Base Radius List
1.0 Z X

Top Radius List


0.5 After:
[Thickness List]
0.0 0.125

Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
Y
[0 0 0] [3 0 0]

Z X
Axis List
Coord 0.3

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base
Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive 1

Solid ID List
1

Cone Parameters
Height List 2

2.0
Y
Base Radius List
Z X
1.0

Top Radius List


0.5 After:
[Thickness List]
0.0 0.125

Modify Solid
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Boolean Operation
Auto Execute Geometry
Base Center Point List
[0 0 0] [3 0 0] Y

Axis List Target Solid List Z X

Coord 0.3 Solid 1 2

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)


-Apply-

OK Cancel
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Solid Torus


This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and
optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation
with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid.

Geometry Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:


1. Block
Action: Create
2. Cylinder
Object: Solid 3. Cone
Method: Primitive 4. Sphere
5. Torus

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be


created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Solid ID List
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Specify the major radius and minor radius.
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0

Minor Radius List


0.5

Modify Solid If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
Boolean Operation... boolean operation on with the created torus.

Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the torus.


Refer. Coordinate Frame Default is the global coord 0.
Coord 0
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Center Point List
Specify the center point and the axis of the torus.
[0 0 0] If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the torus
will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The
Axis List input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame,
therefore, the torus axis will be defined by the absolute value of
Coord 0.3
the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and
Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
1

Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Y
Minor Radius List
0.5 Z X

Modify Solid
After:
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]

Axis List
Coord 0.1 0.2

Y
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor
Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive

Solid ID List
2

Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Y
Minor Radius List
0.25 Z X

Modify Solid
After:
Boolean Operation...

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0

Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]

Axis List Boolean Operation


Geometry
Coord 0.3

Y
-Apply-
Target Solid List
Z X
Solid 1

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)

OK Cancel
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation


This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation
of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.

Boolean Operation Specify the boolean operation type:


Geometry
1. Add
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
Target Solid List
Specify the solid to perform a boolean operation on either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) solids.

Cancel This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing


OK
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after a boolean operation. If the Geometry Preference toggle,
Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will
be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”.
Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will
update the existing mesh on the target solid.
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method)


Creating Solids from Two Surfaces
The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Solid ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: 2 Surface
Deactivated and not used for the 2 Surface option.
Parameterization Method

◆ Chord Length If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
directions. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s
◆ Uniform
connectivity. On the Geometric Properties form under the
menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric you can plot the ξ1
Auto Align Orientations direction of the new curves by turning the Parametric Direction
toggle ON.
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the surfaces to be
created, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor define the
surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the
Ending Surface List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:
• Topology (p. 10)
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Basic Functions is ON which means you do Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces
2 and 3.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
7
Object: Solid 10
11 6
Method: Surface
3
Solid ID List
1
9
2
Option: 2 Surface 12

Parameterization Method

◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform Y
8
Z X
Auto Align Orientations
5
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List After:
Surface 2
7
Ending Surface List 10
11 6
Surface 3

3
-Apply-
1
9
2
12

Y
8
Z X
5
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface
2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
22
6
Object: Solid
Method: 23
Surface

Solid ID List
1 20
5 18

Option: 2 Surface 21
19
Parameterization Method 2


◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform 12 Y

Z X
Auto Align Orientations
17
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
After:
Surface 2

Ending Surface List 22


6
Construct2CurvesSurface(Eval
23

-Apply-
20
5 1 18

21
19
2

12 Y

Surface Select Menu Icon Z X


17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method)


The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing
surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Solid ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points


Option: 3 Surface defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
Parameterization Method relative to the location of the solid’s starting, middle and ending
surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly

◆ Chord Length parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If
◆ Uniform Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining
the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the
surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly
Auto Align Orientations parameterized.

Auto Execute
If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
Starting Surface List directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
Middle Surface List the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.

Ending Surface List

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Auto Align Orientations


By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Starting Surface List the form.

Middle Surface List Specify in Starting, Middle and Ending Surface Lists, the
surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Ending Surface List Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor defining the surface
locations using the Surface Select menu.

-Apply- ☞ More Help:


• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Surface Method With 3 Surface Option Example


Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face
of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu
icon listed below.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 22 6
23
Object: Solid 20 5
21
Method: Surface 18
2 19
Solid ID List 12
17
2

Option: 3 Surface 31
30
Parameterization Method 27
◆ 26
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform Y 1

28
Auto Align Orientations Z X 29
24
25
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
Solid 1.2 After:
Middle Surface List 22 6
23
Surface 2 20 5
21
Ending Surface List
18
Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 2 19
12
17
-Apply-

31
30
27
26

Y 1

Surface Select Menu Icon 28


Z X 29
24
25
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method)


The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing
surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Solid ID List Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points


Option: 4 Surface defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the solid’s starting, second, third and
Parameterization Method ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be

◆ Chord Length uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are
located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
◆ Uniform points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of
where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always
Auto Align Orientations uniformly parameterized.

Auto Execute
Starting Surface List If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction
Second Surface List of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.

Third Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Auto Align Orientations


Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Starting Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Second Surface List

Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass
Third Surface List through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or by cursor defining the surface
locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Ending Surface List

-Apply- ☞ More Help:


• Topology (p. 10)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Surface Method With 4 Surface Option Example


Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face
of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 35
3 34
Object: 32
Solid 33
Method: Surface
22 6
23
Solid ID List 20 5
21
2 18
2 19
12
Option: 4 Surface 17
Parameterization Method 31
30

◆ Chord Length 27
26
◆ Uniform Y
1
28
Auto Align Orientations Z X 29
24
25
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
After:
Solid 1.2
35
Second Surface List 3 34
32
Surface 2 33

Third Surface List


22 6
Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 23
20 5
Ending Surface List 2
21
18
Surface 3 2 19
12
17

-Apply- 31
30
27
26
Y
1
28
Z X 29
24
25
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Solids with the N Surface Option


The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of
existing surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
Object: Solid See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Surface

Solid ID List
1 If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
Option: N-Surfaces relative to the location of the surfaces specified in Surface List.
This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized,
Parameterization Method depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON,

◆ Chord Length the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be
uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located.
◆ Uniform That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.

Auto Align Orientations


If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
Surface List directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
-Apply-

Specify in Surface List, two or more surfaces or faces that the solid
will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the
surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Surface Method with N-Surfaces Option Example


Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between
Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

Before:
Geometry 42

Action: Create 41
39
Object: Solid 38
Method: 36
Surface 10 35
Solid ID List 9
33
1
8 32
43
Option:N-Surfaces 40
14
28 13
7
Parameterization Method 24 37
Y 20

◆ Chord Length 2 34
◆ Uniform X 16
Z
12 15
Auto Align Orientations

Surface List
After:
Surface 2 7:10
42

41
-Apply- 39
38
36
10 35
9
33
8 32
1
43
40
28 13
7 14
24 37
Y 20
2 34
X 16
Z
12 15
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid


The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid
faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with
MSC.Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids (p. 348).

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: B-rep Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Solid ID List
1
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces from the
database that are specified in Surface List.
Delete Original Surfaces

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Surface List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

-Apply- Specify in Surface List, a set of surfaces or solid faces that


form a closed volume. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the
surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu that appears.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• B-rep Solid (p. 24)
• Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid B-rep Method Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and
8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: 4
Solid
2
8 3
Method: B-rep

Solid ID List
14
1 9

Delete Original Surfaces 11


13
Auto Execute 10

Surface List
Y
Surface 2 3 4 8:14 12

Z X
-Apply-

After:

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating a Decomposed Solid


The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex
locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Decompose

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
2
Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid Faces
◆ Face 1

◆ Face 2 The switch to select/show the two Solid Faces.

Solid Face 1
Enter the first solid face to decompose either by entering the ID
from the keyboard (example: Solid 1.1); or by cursor selecting
the solid face.
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List

Face Vertex 2 List Enter in the Face Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices
that will define the surface from which the new solid will be created
from. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to
cursor select the vertices.
Face Vertex 3 List

Face Vertex 4 List


☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
-Apply- • Topology (p. 10)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Decompose Method with Face 1 Option Example


Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid
1.5.

Geometry Step 1:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
2
Method: Decompose
3
Solid ID List 6
2 7
Solid Faces 1
◆ Face 1 1

◆ Face 2
Y 4
5
Solid Face 1 Z X 8
Solid 1.6

Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
1.6(u0.250000)(v0.750000)

Face Vertex 2 List


1.6(u0.788091)(v0.706851)

Face Vertex 3 List


1.6(u0.727486)(v0.239363)

Face Vertex 4 List


1.6(u0.239563)(v0.283655)

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Decompose Method with Face 2 Option Example


Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid
1.6.

Geometry
Step 2:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
2
Method: Decompose
3
6
Solid ID List
2 7
Solid Faces 1
◆ Face 1 1

◆ Face 2
Y 4
5
Solid Face 2 Z X 8
Solid 1.5

Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
Final Step:
1.5(u0.314087)(v0.722847)

Face Vertex 2 List


1.5(u0.707491)(v0.666261) 2
Face Vertex 3 List 3
1.5(u0.658263)(v0.286671) 6 13
16
Face Vertex 4 List 7
9 2
1.5(u0.291373)(v0.250680)
12 14 15
1
-Apply- 10
Y 11 4
5
Z X 8
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Solids from Faces


The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s
exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric
orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid.

Geometry
Action: Create Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Object: Solid Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Face

Solid ID List
1

Set this option to 5 Face or 6 Face.


Option: 6 Face
Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Solid Face 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

Solid Face 2 List


Specify in the Solid Face Lists, the list of surfaces or solid
faces that the solid will be created from. Depending if the form
is set to the 5 Face or 6 Face option, you will see five or six
Solid Face 3 List Solid Face List boxes. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them
using the Surface Select menu.
Solid Face 4 List

Solid Face 5 List

☞ More Help:
Solid Face 6 List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
-Apply-
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Solid Face Method With 6 Faces Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The
option is set to 6 Face.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
5
Method: Face

Solid ID List
1 4
7

6
Option: 6 Face
3
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List
Y
Surface 2 2

Solid Face 2 List Z X

Surface 6

Solid Face 3 List


After:
Surface 4

Solid Face 4 List


Surface 5

Solid Face 5 List


Surface 7

Solid Face 6 List


1
Surface 3

-Apply-

Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Face Method With 5 Faces Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The
option is set to 5 Face.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
3
Object: Solid
Method: Face 5
1
Solid ID List 4 3
1 2
1 2

5
Option: 5 Face
Y 4 6
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List Z X
Surface 1

Solid Face 2 List


Surface 3

Solid Face 3 List After:


Surface 2
3
Solid Face 4 List
Surface 4
5
Solid Face 5 List
Surface 5 1

1 2
-Apply-

Y 4 6

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method)


The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations
that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Method: Vertex created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Solid ID List
1

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Solid Vertex 1 List
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.

Solid Vertex 2 List

Solid Vertex 3 List


Specify in Solid Vertex 1-8 Lists, the list of points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations that the solid will be created
Solid Vertex 4 List from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point
10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or cursor select them using the Point
Select menu.

Solid Vertex 5 List

Solid Vertex 6 List

Solid Vertex 7 List

Solid Vertex 8 List


☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
-Apply-
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Vertex Method Example


Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and
Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create 14
13
15
Object: Solid
12
Method: Vertex

Solid ID List
2

Auto Execute
Solid Vertex 1 List
Point 12

Solid Vertex 2 List Y


Point 13
Z X
Solid Vertex 3 List
Point 14

Solid Vertex 4 List After:


Point 15
13 14
Solid Vertex 5 List 15

Node 34
12
Solid Vertex 6 List
1
Node 44 19
Solid Vertex 7 List
Node 254 16
18
Solid Vertex 8 List
Node 264 17
Y

-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Gliding Solids
The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path
defined by a set of director curves or edges.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Glide Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Solid ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1
If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids
Glide Input Options twisting the solid. One degree-of-freedom of motion is
eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed”
◆ Normal Project Glide logic which basically drags the director curve along the

◆ Fixed Glide base curve or base surface without rotating. Three
degrees-of -freedom of motion are eliminated.

Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the
director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no
1.0 change will occur in the size of the director curve during
the glide.
Auto Execute
Director Curve List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Base Surface List
Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will
act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Surface
List, a base surface or face for the Glide method for solids.
Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for
curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces -
-Apply-
Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or
edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface
Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Solid Glide Method Example


Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director
Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create

Object: Solid
16
Method: Glide 17
2
Solid ID List 12
1 18
Glide Input Options 5

◆ Normal Project Glide 15
◆ Fixed Glide Z

Y
Sweep Parameters X

Scale Factor
0.25

Auto Execute After:


Director Curve List
Curve 5
16
Base Surface List
17
Surface 2
2
12
-Apply-
18
1
5
19
20
21 15
Z

Y
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

4.3 Creating Coordinate Frames


Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method
The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying
three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For
Coordinate Frames (p. 63).

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Coord ID List
1
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Type: Rectangular
Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values
Refer. Coordinate Frame of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered.
Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Coord 0

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference


Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Origin need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

Point on Axis 3
Specify three point locations for: 1 ) the new coordinate frame’s
[0 0 1] origin; 2) a point on the third axis; and 3) a point on the plane
formed by the coordinate frame’s first and third axes. Either
Point on Plane 1-3 enter the point locations’ coordinate values (example: [10 0 0])
or cursor select the point locations using the Point Select menu.
[1 0 0]

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example


Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is
located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The
coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point

Coord ID List
100
2
Type: Cylindrical

Refer. Coordinate Frame


Coord 0 Y

Z X
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]

Point on Axis 3 After:


[0 0 1]

Point on Plane 1-3


[1 0 0]

-Apply- T

2 Z R
100

Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example


Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z
axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the
R-Z plane is at Point 6.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point 1

1
Coord ID List
200

Type: Cylindrical 5

Refer. Coordinate Frame


2
Coord 0 8
Y
Auto Execute 6
Z
Origin X

Point 8

Point on Axis 3
After:
[x8 y8 2]

Point on Plane 1-3


Point 6 1

1
-Apply-

T
2
Z8
200
R
Y

6
Z
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method


The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying
three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on
one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate
Frames (p. 63).

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame
Method: Axis to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Coord ID List
1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Type: Rectangular
Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of
Refer. Coordinate Frame the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is
the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Coord 0

Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.


Axis: Axis 1 and 2

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Origin need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
[0 0 0]

Point on Axis 1
Specify three point locations for: 1) the new coordinate frame’s
[1 0 0] origin, 2) a point on axis 1, 2 or 3 and 3) a point on axis 2, 3 or 1.
Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor
Point on Axis 2 select the point locations by using the Point Select menu.
[0 1 0]

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Coordinate Frame Axis Method Example


Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition
is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a
point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
16 19
Object: Coord
Method: Axis

Coord ID List
100
2 12
Type: Rectangular

Refer. Coordinate Frame 20


Coord 0 Y

Axis: Axis 1 and 2 17 Z X 18

Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
After:
Point on Axis 1
Point 20 16 19
Point on Axis 2
Point 12

-Apply-
2 100 Y
Z 12

X
20
Y

17 Z X 18
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method


The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three
specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create
Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63).

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
Method: frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Euler MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord ID List
1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular Specify the coordinate frame whose axes the three rotations
will be about. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord
Refer. Coordinate Frame 0.
Coord 0
When ON, a Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears
which is described on Rotation Parameters Subordinate
Axis:Rotation Parameters ... Form Example (p. 357).

Auto Execute
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Origin Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
[0 0 0] the form.

-Apply- Specify the point location for the origin of the new coordinate
frame, either by entering the coordinate values which are
expressed within the reference coordinate frame (example:
[10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the
Point Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Coordinate Frame Euler Method Example


Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition
is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14
and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord 13

Method: Euler

Coord ID List
200

Type: Spherical

Refer. Coordinate Frame Y

Coord 100 100


Z X
Y
Axis:
Rotation Parameters ... 12
Z X
14
Auto Execute
Origin
Point 14 After:

-Apply-
13

100
Z X

Y 12
Y 200
X

Z X Z
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example


The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is
pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate
Frames Using the Euler Method (p. 355).
This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified
Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom
on the form.

Rotation Parameters
First Rotation
Axis: About Axis 3 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation
0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.
Second Rotation
Axis: About Axis 1 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation
0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.

Third Rotation
Axis: About Axis 3 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About
Axis 3.
Angle of Rotation
0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.

OK Cancel
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method


The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its
origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to
the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or
face’s parametric ξ 1 direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the ξ 2 direction or
visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63) for more
information.
You can plot the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button
on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
Method: Normal frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Coord ID List
1
Create x-axis of the coordinate frame along the u-direction or
along the v-direction of the surface.

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.


Type: Rectangular
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Origin
[0 0 0] Specify in Origin, the point location for the origin of the new
coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values that
Surface are expressed within the global rectangular coordinate frame,
Coord 0 (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point
location using the Point Select menu.
Specify in Surface, the surface or solid face that the new
coordinate frame will be created on, whose normal direction will
-Apply- define the coordinate frame’s axis 3 direction. Either enter the
ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or
cursor select it by using the Surface Select menu.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Coordinate Frame Normal Method Example


Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis
is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned
with Surface 2’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions.

Geometry Before:
Action: Create
13
Object: Coord 15

Method: Normal
16
Coord ID List
1 2

Type: Rectangular 2

Auto Execute
Y
1 12
Origin
Z
Point 16 X
14
Surface
Surface 2
After:
13
-Apply- 15

Y Z
16
1
X

Y
1 12
Z
X
14
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Coordinate Frame Normal Method On a Face Example


Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face
of Solid 1.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Normal
1
17
Coord ID List 13
2 9
16
10
T

Type: Rectangular Z 12
R 14

Auto Execute Y
11
15
Origin
Z
Point 17 X

Surface
solid 1.6
After:

-Apply-

Z
1
X2
17
13 Y
9
16
10
T

Z 12
R 14

Y
11
15
Z
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method


The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its
origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using
existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame
is then created.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 2Vector
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Coord ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Type: Rectangular Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate


Refer. Coordinate Frame frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Coord 0 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.

Auto Execute

Origin
[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

Vector for Axis 1

Vector for Axis 2 Select the vectors that define two of the through coordinate
frame axes.

-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method


The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the
designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the
graphics viewport.

Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method:View Vector
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Coord ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Type: Rectangular Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.

Select the reference coordinate frame from which the Euler


Refer. Coordinate Frame angles are to be computed and subsequently used to define the
Coord 0 new coordinate frame.

Auto Execute

Origin
[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

4.4 Creating Planes


Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method
The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.

Geometry

Action: Create Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Object: Plane created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method Point-Vector

Plane ID List
1

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran


Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Auto Execute the form.

Point List
Specify the points from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point1 5, Curve 1.1. The Point Select
Vector List menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate points.

Specify the vectors for the new planes. Either cursor select the
Apply vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1
5. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Point-Vector Method Example


Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector.

Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Point-Vector

Plane ID List
1
1 1

Auto Execute

Point List
Point 1 Y

Vector List
Z X
Vector 1

Apply After:

1 1

Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method


The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified
vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.

Geometry

Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Vector Normal

Plane ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Plane Offset Distance


Used to define the plane offset from the vector base point.
0.0
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Vector List the form.

Point 2
Specify the vectors from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
Apply keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Vector Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate vectors.

☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PART